JP2018161210A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing an over-winning.SOLUTION: In a ball entrance member 530 where a game ball entering a specific winning port 65a is fed, inflow ports 953j for feeding the entering game ball to the rear side of a game board 13 are formed at two positions with a predetermined interval therebetween. The inflow ports 953j are formed at positions that do not overlap in the direction of gravity with a pair of wing members arranged above the specific winning port 65a. With this, it is possible to make it easy to guide the game ball entering the specific winning port 65a to the inflow ports 953j. As the result, an over-winning can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 103

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine provided with a entrance opening formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the entrance Known (Patent Document 1).

  Here, a gaming machine equipped with is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. HEI). The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that enter the entrance are collected on the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member Into each ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-3092

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that over-winning is likely to occur.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress over winning.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured such that a game entrance is formed so that a game ball can be entered, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entrance, and the entrance to the entrance. And a passage member into which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface flows, and a plurality of the passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval. .

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, wherein the detection sensor is a contact between the rolling surface and the passage member. It is arranged at the connecting portion.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2 is formed so as to be able to contact a gaming ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. First entrance means having a first inclined surface, wherein the entrance is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the entrance, and the first Guide means is disposed between one end in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, over-winning can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, over-winning can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, over-winning can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a back perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of a back base. It is a rear view of a front base and an irradiation unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the front base and irradiation unit in the arrow XXXVI direction view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partial enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) is a top view of an irradiation unit, (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the arrow XLIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). 44A is a rear view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. (A) is a front view of a 1st block, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line | wire of Fig.46 (a), (c) is a front view of a 2nd block. FIG. 46D is a sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission at the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connection member. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. 54A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, FIG. 54B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove formation member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the projection plate member, gear member, and groove | channel in the LXb-LXb line | wire of Fig.60 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove formation member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the projection plate member, gear member, and groove | channel in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. FIG. 64A is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 65B is a projection plate taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 66C is a cross-sectional view of the member, the gear member, and the groove forming member, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is the partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 1st block vicinity, (b) is the partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 2nd block vicinity. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 2nd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state where the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the projection unit. It is a front view of the game board in 7th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a base board, a prize opening unit, and a ball sending unit. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit. (A) is a perspective front view of a prize opening unit, (b) is a perspective rear view of a prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of a front unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a front unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a front unit. . (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of a displacement member, (c) is a perspective front view of a displacement member. FIG. 88 is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in a range XCI in FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 88 is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in a range XCI in FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a drive unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line | wire of FIG.93 (b). FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of a specific prize opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific prize opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific prize opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a specific prize opening unit. FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the specific prize opening unit in the CII-CII line of FIG.99 (c). (A) And (b) is a perspective front view of a specific prize opening unit. (A) is a front view of a specific prize opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific prize opening unit along line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of a specific prize opening unit and a drive unit, (b) is a side view of a specific prize opening unit and a drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is the specific winning opening unit along the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of a drive unit. (A) is a front view of a pitching unit, (b) is a side view of a pitching unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of a pitching unit, (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of a pitching unit. (A) is a front view of a distribution unit, (b) is a side view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXIIa-CXIIa line | wire of FIG. 109 (a), FIG.112 (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG.112 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in the range CXIII of FIG.112 (b). (A) is a front view of a channel | path unit, (b) is a side view of a channel | path unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of an exchange unit, (b) is a rear view of an exchange unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIX-CXIX line | wire of FIG. 119 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board along the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). 119 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the gaming board along the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and displacement member in an 8th embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit and displacement member in 10th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the back surface base and displacement member in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the back surface base and displacement member in 12th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in 13th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line | wire of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 14th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXXb-CXXXb line | wire of Fig.130 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CXXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a top view of a drive unit, (c) is a perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) is sectional drawing of a game board, FIG.133 (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb line | wire of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the game board in 16th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 17th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which looked back at the winning hole unit in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning hole unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line | wire of Fig.135 (a). (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the winning opening unit from the back, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the winning port unit 930 along the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line in FIG. 136 (a). (A) is the schematic diagram which looked at the winning slot unit from the back, and (b) is the cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning slot unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 140a is in an opened state (open state), the first winning combination 140a is compared with a case where the first electric combination 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is not changed during the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times 140a is opened. In addition, during the time of probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 140a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 as a trigger (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbols with the passage of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric combination 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time may be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or shortening the time. When it is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  The first winning combination 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning port 140, and the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to make the first electric accessory 140a open and aim to win 15R probability variation by winning the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 481, 491, 661, and 880.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are each displaced to the retracted position, and in FIG. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively disposed in the inner space of the rear case 300. Housed in order.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a front frame-shaped base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 that are displaceably disposed on the base member 410. A projecting member 485, a retracted position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device). 81) and can be displaced between the overhanging positions projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (a first drive motor 481 and a second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made different (a plurality of types of displacement modes are formed). Details of this structure will be described later.

  The projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection. And a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When the light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is changed into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that increases the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (pattern or pattern). Can appear clearly). In addition, a structure that improves workability when assembling a plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is employed. Details of these structures will be described later.

  The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both the base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 is displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81) and an overhanging position protruding to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP that urges the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 performs reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP around the balance position (predetermined position). Structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

  Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement that is displaceably disposed on the base member 410). Member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a drive force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive). When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member may be displaced in a different manner. It is formed so as to kill. Details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R include the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the carriage member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

  The left displacement member 420L is a long member disposed in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide drilled at the lower end. A moving groove 423. The connection shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connection hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

  The connecting shaft 421 is set to have a length dimension that protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the protruding tip of the connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). 17 and 18) is slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

  The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of a carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative change in position with respect to the cart member 440L (rotation with the axis of the connection hole 422 as the rotation center) is allowed.

  The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted therethrough. . Accordingly, in the state where the lower left rack 488L is stopped, only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 is reversed. Can be formed.

  The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L to be driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, and is a connection hole 431 that is drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

  The connection hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-like body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410 a formed in the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

  The carriage member 440 rolls on a driven surface that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (upper intermediate portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). And two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 that are rotatably supported at both ends of each of the connecting shafts 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the cart member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the cart member 440 rolls on the driven surface. .

  The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and the rolling wheels 442 of the carriage member 440 are placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported by the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

  The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide portion that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (upper intermediate portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction in the two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 are rotatably inserted and the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. Rack gear 452.

  Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is formed with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is formed with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since the configuration is substantially the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  However, the upper right rack 450R is provided with a rack gear 452 in front of it. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is arranged with the connecting hole 451 formed in a position offset from the front side, and is disposed at a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, a pinion gear 459 that is rotatably supported by the base member 410 is engaged with both rack gears 452.

  Accordingly, in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 provided between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement direction can be the reverse direction (the direction in which they are close to each other or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 arranged may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same direction.

  Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. 13 and 14 show a state where the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state where the back cover 412 is removed. In addition, in FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, the illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive in which the pinion gear 482 is engaged. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a projecting member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a rack gear 486 And a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the last gear 487e of the gear train.

  The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back of the left front cover 411L. The The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

  The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a which is located eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and shafts thereof. And a drive pin 484c that protrudes from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first driving motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the driving gear 483 moves to the sliding groove 484b of the driving arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted on, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction around the shaft support hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

  The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a into which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed on the front surface of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extension / contraction direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front surface of the base member 410, a front end rail disposed on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base rail interposed between the base end rail and the front end rail. And an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the end rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485 is pushed up or pushed down by the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the protruding member 485 is used as the base. The member 410 is moved up and down in the vertical direction.

  The rack gear 486 is engraved along the ascending / descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front gear 487a meshed with the rack gear 486 and the front and right front sides of the base member 410. Each is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the gear train (the gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated using the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

  The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, a rack gear 488a engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b projecting from the front at the end in the longitudinal direction. Are provided. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R have different positions in the vertical direction, and with the rack gears 488a facing each other, between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 (in the width direction). 19 in the left-right direction).

  The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through the opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack It meshes with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 is moved up and down, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are mutually connected by the rotation of the last gear 487a. It can be linearly moved in the opposite directions (directions close to each other or away from each other).

  The drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrudes to the front side through a linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. And it is rotatably inserted in the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Thus, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are linearly moved, so that the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In addition, the extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the driven surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

  Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, for easy understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive in which the pinion gear 492 is engaged. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

  The base member 410 has an upper portion (an upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially stacked on the front side. Is done.

  The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the portion projecting upward from the upper intermediate portion 410f, and the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 projecting from the rear surface of the projecting portion has a pinion gear. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper middle portion 410f.

  The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and these And a linear drive groove 494c located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second driving motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the driving gear 493 moves to the sliding groove 494b of the driving arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface receives the action, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction around the shaft support hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

  As described above, the distal end of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the cart member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. The upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right by rolling along the rolling surface.

  In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the driven surface, the upper left rack 450L serves as the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. Is displaced (slided) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19), and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls is formed in the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

  Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23, respectively. It is a rear view.

  19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 illustrate the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. This corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is disposed at the protruding position in the first mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being disposed at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost positions (positions that are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and The protruding member 485 is disposed at the lowermost position.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, respectively, after the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the state shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction close to each other in the left-right direction (width direction) and the protruding member 485 is raised up to the state (the protruding position in the first mode). It should be noted that the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are in a combined state (a state in which the three side surfaces are in close contact) at the extended position in the first mode.

  Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484 c of the drive arm 484 is moved to the sliding groove 485 a of the protruding member 485. The protrusion member 485 is raised by pushing up the inner wall surface (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  When the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (see FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R acts on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, so that the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction approaching each other.

  On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421 is affected. As a result, the carriage member 440 rolls on the driven surface, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17). 18).

  Further, when the upper end side (cart member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R The upper end side (cart member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  In the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is such that the lower end displacement amount is smaller than the upper end displacement amount ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (the extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (the extended length of the driven surface).

  In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach substantially the same time (see FIGS. 23 and 24). That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (cart member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

  Accordingly, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotating while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in a configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. This is the first time that the drive means can be used.

  Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (cart member 440) is different from the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the cart member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, a change in the distance between the two can be absorbed. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the driving pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are achieved. be able to.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the directions opposite to those described above from the state shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced away from each other in the left-right direction (width direction) up to the state (retracted position) shown in FIGS. Is lowered.

  Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-driven state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, A second mode for displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the protruding position in the second mode.

  Here, in the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position), the left displacement member 420L of the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates on its upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows rotation as a center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

  Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pins of the figure drive arm 484 are driven. When 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the coupling hole 422) as the center of rotation.

  Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in the non-driven state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L and A third mode for displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhang position in the third mode.

  Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member The member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

  Accordingly, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the drive arm The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is applied to the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in the direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion)

  That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the center of rotation. In the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended on the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to produce an effect that gives the player's intention. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed in magnitude, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. For this reason, it is difficult to produce an effect that expresses the player's intention.

  On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the production is not a single pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that makes a player's intention.

  In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can cause the displacement (linear motion) to be dominant, while the second mode. In the third mode (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the displacement motion forms are different. Can be made. As a result, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and an effect that makes the player's intention can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the conventional product, there are those that change the displacement mode by changing only the rotation direction while the rotation center remains constant, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are The rotation center is not the only difference in the rotation direction but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also different (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect Then, the lower end side is set as the rotation center), and the change of the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, and the effect of giving the player's intention can be easily performed.

  In the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), and the direction of the rotation is the third mode. The direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation. Therefore, at the initial stage of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced toward each other. Can be difficult. On the other hand, in the first mode, the protruding member 485 is raised in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the protruding member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, when the protruding member 485 is raised at the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Can make the player expect that.

  In the displacement unit 400, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R are respectively disposed (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed on the carriage member 440. And the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is inserted so as to be rotatable and slidable.

  Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion including the rotational component (first aspect) and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and to displace the displacement member along the guide groove. However, in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required ( That is, when the locus is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the carriage member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It is necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to 488L and 488R).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in the linear direction, and therefore the carriage member 440 may be guided by the driven surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can use a rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve durability and operation reliability.

  Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect. One end side (upper end side) of each of the displacement members 420L and 420R is guided by the carriage member 440 rolling on the driven surface, and the other end side (lower end side) thereof is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to the respective modes, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 in front view, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 610 includes an annular rear surface base 611 and an annular front surface base 612 disposed in front of the rear surface base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the rear surface base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are accommodated in the internal space.

  It should be noted that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in front view (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), and is an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In the (ie, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is not visible to the player.

  The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, allows the player to visually recognize the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form that forms a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the rear side and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are disposed concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

  A plurality of teeth are formed on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is engaged. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous with the projection plate member 620 in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. The projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by C being guided by the guide groove 641. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

  The irradiation unit 650 is a unit including a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line in the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass through the approximate center of the projection plate member 620. In addition, the detail of the attachment structure to the base member 610 of the irradiation unit 650 is mentioned later.

  The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and the leading gear 662 of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. The gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 is engaged with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

  Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a standing on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, 611a, and an outer standing portion standing on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An installation portion 611c, an intermediate standing portion 611b standing between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a 611d, an outer recessed portion 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation protrusion 611f that protrudes from an annular plate member with a predetermined interval therebetween. It is formed.

  The inner standing portion 611a is erected from the inner edge of the annular plate member to the front side (front side in FIG. 33) and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The outer standing portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member to the front side (the front side in FIG. 33) and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The intermediate standing part 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing part 611a and the outer standing part 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

  The inner concave groove 611d is an area for arranging an outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, and surrounds the three directions of the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b. Formed.

  The outer concave groove 611e is an area for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, and is formed so as to surround three directions of an annular plate member, an outer standing portion 611c, and an intermediate standing portion 611b. The

  The restriction protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed to project from the front side. In this embodiment, six restricting protrusions 611f are formed at predetermined intervals.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, an inner standing portion 611a, an intermediate standing portion 611b, an outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation projection 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. An installation portion 612a, an intermediate standing portion 612b, an outer standing portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the assembled state of the base member 610, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are superimposed on the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the restricting protrusion 611f.

  A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 and in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g have an axial state with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

  As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and is a unit for causing light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and extends along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by the plurality of irradiation units 650.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 and between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlapped with the rear surface of the front base 612. By this, it is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of these both bases 611,612.

  36 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the middle standing portion 612b of the front base 612 by a notch at the leading end side. Similarly, a substantially semi-circular cutout 611b1 is cut out at a position in the same phase as the cutout 612b1 on the standing front end side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

  That is, in the state where the standing front end surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, the assembled state of the base member 610), a substantially circular opening in front view is formed by the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2. The These circular openings are respectively formed at positions facing the respective LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

  Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Is done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

  Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

  The notch 621 is a part for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the restricting protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line direction perpendicular to the radial direction. Is done.

  The reflection portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated on the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

  As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the irregularly reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed from a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). The gear member 630 is disposed on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (the back side in FIG. 37), and its axis is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is inclined from the toothed portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the rear surface portion 632 on the side surface on the rear surface side, and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end of the rear surface portion 632 to the front side. An inclined surface portion 633 to be provided.

  The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is engaged as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire periphery.

  The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is connected to the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined to the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 to the front side is the virtual angle B1 between the imaginary line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632, and the virtual angle obtained by extending the back surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. The intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set substantially the same (θ1 = θ2).

  The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620. The groove forming member 640 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape. Arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. The groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The groove forming member 640 includes a side surface portion 641a of one surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b of the other surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface portion on the front side. A front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from the end on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 to the back side.

  The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front surface (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and has a constant facing interval around the axis and the plane on the front surface side of the projection plate member 620. It is formed apart.

  The abutting surface 641b is a surface that abuts against the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 so as to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. In addition, a circle is formed around the axis.

  Therefore, the side surface portion 641 a and the contact surface 641 b can be formed on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove formation member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove formation member 640.

  The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface inclined from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is determined by the intersection angle θ3 between the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front surface portion 642, and the virtual angle obtained by extending the front surface portion 642 toward the inner periphery. The intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set substantially the same (θ3 = θ4).

  Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A to 40C are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40A to 40C show a transition state when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. 39 and 40 show a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, in a state where the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side of the projection plate member 620 (FIG. 39 (b) (lower side) and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 are arranged between the opposing sides (guide groove 641).

  Further, the distance dimension L1 between the front end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

  Therefore, in order to allow the projection plate member 620 to rotate, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is provided, the projection plate member 620 corresponds to the gap in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if it deviates, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the projection C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40C from FIG. 40A, attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is disposed on the front base 612.

  Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by disposing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

  Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f where the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be disposed on the front base 612 in which the projection plate member 620 is disposed.

  Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the shaft of the collar C is on the back side (upper side in FIG. 40 (a)) and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)) with respect to the shaft of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state where it is tilted. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

  From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis | shaft of the color | collar C can be arrange | positioned concentrically with the axis | shaft of the axial part 612f.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)), so that the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It arrange | positions in the position which a surface opposes. Thereafter, the collar C can be disposed inside the guide groove 641 by rotating the projection plate member 620.

  Here, when a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to arrange the collar. There is a problem that it is necessary to arrange the color, and the assembly efficiency is low because both hands are used for the assembly.

  On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the assembly efficiency of the projection unit 600 can be improved.

  The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the rear base 611 from the rear side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  41A to 43B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

  41B, 42B, and 43B, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is as follows. The light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated in a straight-line manner as it is considered that there is no influence on the invention. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the light with the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is applied to the projection plate member 620 at its outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41 (b)).

  In this case, when the light traveling in the projection plate member 620 is irradiated on the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 decreases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. The light traveling through the member 620 is also applied to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 even when the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620. Total reflection is possible on the back side. Therefore, it can suppress that the quantity of the light which injected from the edge part of the projection plate member 620 reduces.

  That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light is totally reflected without entering the medium having a low refractive index. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air is such that the refractive index of air is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), and thus proceeds inside the projection plate member 620. The light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the light with the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 out of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 enters the groove forming member 640. Is done.

  The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected from the inside of the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

  That is, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected on the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel in the same manner as the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also be transmitted through the projection plate member 620, diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 is also incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, since the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light irradiated from the light source A can be increased, the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620. By increasing the amount of the pattern, the pattern or design can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance is accordingly increased. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is compared to the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle of the light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is reduced by the amount that is shifted in the direction). This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected to the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 has an intersection angle θ4 that is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) is reflected toward the end 644, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light with the irradiation angle β is projected to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the light with the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 out of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the gear member 630.

  The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected from the inside of the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  Light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620 in the same manner as light having an irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, since the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A can be increased, the amount of light reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member By increasing the value, the pattern or design can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), the gear member 630 can be hardly seen by the player, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above with respect to the light source A (see FIG. 43 (a) downward direction). The incident angle at the time of irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount that the position is shifted. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

  Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 has an intersection angle θ2 that is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light irradiated at the irradiation angle γ The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Moreover, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected on the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and a mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

  44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). 45A is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 45B is an irradiation unit 650 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. FIG. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state where the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

  The substrate member 652 is formed from a material that can be elastically deformed into a band shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting unit that emits light for entering from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of the LEDs 651 are oriented in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front surface of the substrate member 652. (FIG. 44 (b) left and right direction) are arranged at equal intervals.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are disposed on the center side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. In addition, second blocks 654 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are difficult to elastically deform) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 of the substrate member 652 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46C is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG.

  The first block 653 includes a bottom wall portion 653a that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a side wall portion 653b that is erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (see FIG. 46A). It is formed in a box shape with the front side open.

  Of the four side wall parts 653b, the opposing side wall part 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall part 653a) is provided with a fastening hole h in the end face on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening holes h are provided are connected to each other by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

  The second block 654 includes a bottom wall portion 654a that is rectangular in front view and a side wall portion 654b that is erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. An opening 654a1 having a rectangular shape in front view is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted.

  Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h in the end surface on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c. The connecting wall 654c has a fastening hole h formed in an end surface on the front side thereof, and a screw S1. Can be concluded.

  In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed in two portions of each of the side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (See (a) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, the positions of the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 can be positioned and held at the positions.

  The first block 653 is symmetric with respect to a first virtual plane (that is, a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (FIG. 46A, vertical direction). In addition, it is formed in a shape that is symmetric with respect to a second virtual plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 46A) and is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

  Therefore, since the first block 653 can be shared in the irradiation unit 650 in which the two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can do. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have both the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability during the assembly operation is improved. Can be achieved.

  Similarly, the 2nd block 654 is with respect to the 1st virtual surface (namely, virtual plane each including the axial center of the two fastening holes h) which passes through the center of an up-down direction (FIG.46 (c) up-down direction). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

  Therefore, since the second block 654 can be made common in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 is disposed for the substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can do. In addition, when the second block 654 is assembled to the board member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the board member 620, so that the workability during the assembly work is improved. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 44 and FIG. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions aligned with the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and spaced apart from adjacent ones. The

  Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are overlapped with the back surface of the board member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the board member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. As a result, the substrate member 652 is fastened and fixed to the back side. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the board member 652.

  Only the LED 651 is disposed (mounted) on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are disposed (mounted) on the back surface of the substrate member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with the front surface opened, and the opened side is disposed so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both the blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a recess on the surface on which the board member 652 is overlaid (arranged), an electronic component or connector mounted on the board member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, the electronic component and the connector can be covered and protected by the both blocks 653 and 654, so that the electronic component and the connector are prevented from being damaged due to contact with the surrounding displacement member (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can.

  The circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) due to contact with a surrounding member (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can. In addition, the portion of the board member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the back side (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. Thereby, it can suppress that a circuit is damaged (disconnection) also about the part in which both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

  An arrangement method (assembly method) of the irradiation unit 650 configured as described above to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 and in an area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, the holding pins 612g erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654 while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652. .

  Thus, the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) are held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the position where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the back surface base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front surface base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LED 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same interval as the other. Is done.

  Here, the projection unit 600 causes light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of LEDs 651 (attachment), each LED 651 is adjusted by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, and the labor of arrangement work increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is disposed (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LED 651 can be disposed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the trouble of arranging the LED 651 accordingly.

  Further, the holding pin 612g of the back surface base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, so that the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed. The direction of the irradiated surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the back base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces, and each LED 651 is simply inserted through the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the attitude (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), it is possible to suppress the trouble of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 from this point.

  In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and both the blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612. It is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture by suppressing the warpage or the deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input or by correcting the warp or the deflection of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be prevented from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

  In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the board member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is disposed (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in a front view). Established. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the board member 652 itself, so that the posture of the board member 652 is set to a desired posture. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. Easy to do.

  Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface of the board member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

  Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 (the horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

  In this case, in this embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed in two places is formed in the connecting wall 654c, the second block 654 has a longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 correspondingly. Can be shortened. The second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in such a posture that the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall part 653b in which the fastening hole h is not formed is positioned on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the board member 652.

  Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). ) Can be shortened, and a space can be provided between adjacent irradiation units 650 (a space can be provided). In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed by using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily approached.

  On the other hand, since both the fastening holes h formed in two places are formed in the connection wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. That is, the fastening position of the board member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warping or bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, and it is possible to easily correct the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. Easy to do.

  In this case, in the 1st block 653, since the space | interval of the fastening hole h formed in two places becomes large, there exists a possibility that the restraint of the board | substrate member 652 between these two fastening holes h may become weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and a protrusion 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the board member 652. Insert it into the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warpage and bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warping and bending of the board member 652 itself. It is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the screw S1 separately, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost. It is easier to maintain.

  Note that both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left end and right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, not restricted by the second block 654). There is a possibility that the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in a direction in which the arc center is located on the front side. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can be applied as a force in a direction in which the back surfaces of both ends of the substrate member 652 are pressed against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 that is rectangular in front view, a front base 820 that is superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear side of the rear base 830. Disposed drive motor 880, displacement member 850 that is rotated relative to rear base 830 and front base 820 by the drive force of drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of drive motor 880 to displacement member 850 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

  The rear base 830 protrudes from the respective shaft centers of the opening 831 that is formed to have a size that allows the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 that are formed, and a rear side regulating portion 834 that protrudes from the front side and extends in a curved shape.

  The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back surface side of the back surface base 830 is inserted into the opening 831. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

  The opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thereby, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be detached from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the back surface base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts replacement work steps when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

  The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 described later are pivotally supported and rotatably supported, and are formed to protrude from the back surface base 830 to the front side in a columnar shape.

  The back side regulating portion 834 is a projection that regulates displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (the depth direction in FIG. 47), and protrudes from the front side of the back base 830 and also includes a connecting member 870 described below. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

  The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side toward the back side (from the front side of FIG. 47 to the back side of the page), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge of the back side, and protrudes to the back side. A protrusion 823, a front-side regulating portion 824 that protrudes on the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes on the back side.

  The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 described later is inserted, and is recessed below the right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

  The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap in which a later-described transmission mechanism 860 and a connection member 870 are disposed between the back base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state therebetween.

  The protrusion 823 is a protrusion with which one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of an urging spring SP described later is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and protrudes from the back side of the front base 820.

  The front side restricting portion 824 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side in FIG. 47), protrudes from the back side of the front base 820, and follows the displacement of the connecting member 870. The curved shape is extended.

  The bulging portion 825 is a projecting wall that is disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, at a predetermined interval, and is formed to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 to the back side.

  The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the driving motor 880 is transmitted through the transmission gears 861 and 862 by engaging with each other in series. Is transmitted.

  The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is coupled to the coupling member 870, a projecting portion 863c that projects in an arc shape around the shaft, and a rotational position thereof. And a plate-like sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

  The tooth portion 863 a is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

  The shaft portion 863b is a shaft coupled to the coupling member 870, protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side, and is disposed at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation axis of the transmission gear 863.

  The projecting portion 863c is a projection for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction. The projecting portion 863c is formed to project from the outer edge portion on the back side of the transmission gear 863 and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to be curved in a circular shape.

  The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks a detection region of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by a tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to protrude radially outward on the side surface that is not.

  The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is formed to be bent in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, with one end (upper end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction. A gear side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed by protruding upward from the outside of the curved portion. Part 873.

  The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

  The displacement side connection hole 872 is a through hole into which a shaft portion 853 of a displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

  The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip is disposed between the back-side restriction portion 834 of the back surface base 830 and the front-side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820. Is done.

  Further, the contact portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction at the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the back-side restriction portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the back base 830.

  The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . The cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

  The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (pin supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Formed. Thereby, since the pin member 890 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it can be prevented from falling off the vertical displacement unit 800.

  The displacement member 850 is a member with decoration on the front side, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 includes a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 that transmits the driving force of the connection member 870.

  The shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end of the displacement member, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 while the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851. The displacement member 850 can be disposed in front of the front base 820 in a state where the displacement member 850 can rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

  The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (the lower end in FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. In addition, when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from the lower side of the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the back side, and the protruding distance is the front side of the back base. It is formed to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always biased upward in the gravity direction with respect to the front base 820.

  As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. When the displacement member 850 is disposed in the front base 820, the shaft portion 853 is below the front base 820 (FIG. 50). Projected to the lower position. Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

  As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. Thereby, when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced, the rotating shaft can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821 and 841 and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged by increasing the resistance at one location.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is.

  54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is disposed in the raised position (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

  In the first position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the shaft portion 863b is connected to the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

  Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state in which a force component in a direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 is not generated (that is, a dead point). As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the drive motor 880 is driven to rotate, and each of the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side (the lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and rotate the displacement member 850.

  In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the shaft portion 863b, the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement of the connecting member 870 The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction for displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the force by which the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 is pulled by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is generated. The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when it is displaced from the first position.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead point), power supply to drive motor 880 is performed. An explanation will be given when the is turned off.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the shaft center (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863 are shown. Gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP at a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other. The force is balanced (intermediate position).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off, so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). It is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform reciprocal displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthogonal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be subjected to an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, it is different from the above-described displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the aspect, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement simply by turning on / off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. Since it is not necessary to make it complicated, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

  Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced with the shaft hole 851 as an axis, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the action of gravity of the displacement member 850 is achieved. When the reciprocating displacement due to the elastic restoring force of the urging spring SP is performed by the displacement member 850, the displacement on the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction, Displacement combined with rotational movement about the shaft hole 851 can also be used. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863. Since the posture of 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and an interesting displacement can be made to the displacement member.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are Since the straight line connecting the shaft centers and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the gear side connection hole 871 and the shaft side of the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other, The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction from the balance position to the push-pull direction. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balanced position. Can be continued easily.

  52 and 55, when electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is pushed downward further as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and rotate the displacement member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is disposed at the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed below. The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. Thereby, since the axial part 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted in the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arrange | positioned below, the displacement member 850 can be made into the attitude | position pressed down below.

  In the second position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

  Therefore, in the second position, a state can be formed in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57 (a) to 57 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back surface base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back surface base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

  Therefore, in the first position, it is possible to increase the resistance when driving the displacement member 850. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 is in a stopped state in order to form a retracted state in which the displacement member 850 is disposed upward and the third symbol display device 81 is visible from the player. However, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is in the second state). In the state where the driving range θ6 is driven), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, if the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the coupling member 870 disposed between the transmission gear 863 and the back surface base 830 can be increased, so that resistance when the coupling member 870 is displaced is increased. Can be reduced.

  Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance for displacing the connecting member 870 is reduced. The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 57C, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

  Here, when the displacement member that is displaced up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can abut the abutting portion 873c of the connecting member 870 on the transmission gear 863. The force for stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 is 2 between the force stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and the force stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving of the drive motor 880) is stopped. Can be distributed in one. As a result, the displacement member 850 that has been displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. 58 (a) to 58 (c) illustrate a transition state from the first position. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is indicated by a broken line.

  58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the second position is changed from the first position to the second position. As the position is displaced, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

  Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

  Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position. The displacement member 850 can be quickly brought into a stopped state when it is displaced to a position and stopped.

  That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stop state due to the inertial force that stops the operation. However, since the resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased, the stop state can be quickly formed. can do.

  On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not disposed at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect effect by the extending operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second driving range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released, and the reciprocating displacement is performed with the displacement member 850 being the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the projecting configuration is provided. Generation of resistance by the portion 863c can be avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly.

  Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. FIG. 59C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front-side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Placed in.

  That is, the front-side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape accompanying the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. Thereby, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872, the clearance between the shaft and the hole is inclined in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850. Thus, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

  On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is restrained from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the position where the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be set as the state which is not arrange | positioned.

  Thereby, the clearance gap between the contact part 873 of the connection member 870 in the 2nd position, the front base 820, and the back surface base 830 can be enlarged. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

  Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 has an abutment portion 873 substantially on a straight line connecting the shaft center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the shaft center of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the opposite side to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles against the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, so that the shaft of the transmission gear 863 is The inclination of the gear side connection hole 871 of the part 863b and the connection member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. However, in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. The outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is set to be the same.

  First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60A is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60B is a projection along the LXb-LXb line in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

  As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, gear members 630 and groove forming members 2640 are disposed on the rear and front sides of the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620, respectively. Projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of gear member 630 and groove forming member 2640. In addition, the projection plate member 2620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

  The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620. The groove forming member 2640 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. The groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the front side of the projection plate member 2620 (the upper side in FIG. 60B), and its axis is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612).

  The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and has a recessed width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the plurality of collars C that are rotatably supported by the base member 610 are guided by the guide grooves 2641, so that the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 63 (b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

  In FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at this time is considered as having no influence on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in a straight line manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the light with the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is applied to the projection plate member 620 with its outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axial center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge part of the projection board member 2620 can be arrange | positioned near LED651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light quantity) projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), irradiation of the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641 out of the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651. Light having an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing), the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected to the projection plate member 2620. It can be made to enter.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 62A) of the guide groove 641 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is irradiated. The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface of the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

  That is, by making the guide groove 2641 concave on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

  Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 so as to be recessed in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it is possible to combine the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620. .

  Compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light quantity) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance is accordingly increased. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the light which irradiates the gear member 630 among the lights irradiated from the light source A of LED651 is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the state where the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer periphery of the projection plate member 620 has been described. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

  First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 64A is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a projection along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640. FIG.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65C is a diagram of the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the LXVc-LXVc line in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape in front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the rear side and the front side at the outer peripheral edge thereof. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 that protrudes to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge thereof.

  The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes to the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the protrusion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end of the groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Is done. On the other hand, the protrusion 3623 that protrudes to the back side is set at the tip of the imaginary line G that connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. The

  The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 includes a groove 3635 that is recessed in the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 64B) with a predetermined interval, and a screw that is formed to penetrate in the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval. A stop hole 636 for use.

  The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction, and are formed on both circumferential sides of each retaining hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64B).

  The groove forming member 3640 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed so as to penetrate the side surface on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction and a concave groove 3645 which is recessed with a predetermined interval. And an opening 646 for screwing.

  The concave groove 3645 is a groove provided in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thus, when the groove forming member 3640 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

  In this case, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is, as shown in FIG. 65, an opening 646 for inserting the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Accordingly, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when the gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove formation member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the light irradiated from LED651 (light source A) is demonstrated.

  66A and 66B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is not shown for easy understanding.

  In FIG. 66B, similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in a straight line state. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

  66A and 66B, among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is emitted from the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. Incident from the side.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Accordingly, light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axial center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily made to reach the reflection portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened. And the design can be clearly revealed.

  On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first implementation. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the embodiment.

  Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side. Can be prevented from entering. Thereby, it can suppress that the display given to the reflection part 622 of the projection board member 3620 floats (displays) with lights other than LED651.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  Further, in this case, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, so that the grounding surface can be secured and projected. The groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 can be prevented from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

  Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted from the gap to the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620, There is a possibility that light leaks from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  On the other hand, since the projection 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is reflected between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, light can be prevented from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  Furthermore, the projection 3623 can increase the dimension of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 66 (a)), so that the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Next, an irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68A is a partial enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partial enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, FIG. 68 schematically shows a state where the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the board member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the screw S2 is set such that the height dimension of the head (the vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the protruding amount of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the protruding amount of the LED 651.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is placed on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface comes into contact (externally), the dimension is set such that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot contact the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

  Thereby, LED651 can be protected by the head of screw S2. In other words, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when the projection plate member 620 is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial backlash based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. Contact with the head of S2 can avoid contact with the LED 651, and as a result, the LED 651 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed from a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed from a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect. Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, since the projection plate member 620 is worn, the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. In addition, the contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

  As described above, the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, so that the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

  Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial shakiness caused by the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts can be moderated, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

  Next, a projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disk shape when viewed from the front and is rotated around the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A case will be described in which the sliding displacement is made in one direction.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a base member 5610 whose central portion is open, and is slidably disposed in an opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for making light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidably displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620.

  The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear base 5611 whose central portion is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape is disposed in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611. And a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665) in an internal space formed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

  As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 612c that is erected at the outer edge on the back side, and an opening that is horizontally long when viewed from the center. A central opening 5612h, an inner standing part 612a standing on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, a pair of left and right holding parts 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It is mainly formed by two shaft portions 5612k that are formed to project from the gap between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back side, and a sliding projection 5612m that is formed to project from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the back side. The

  The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the front center of the front base 5612. The player can visually recognize the pattern and symbols of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

  The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the back side (front side in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. In addition, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 that is recessed in a manner of being recessed on the front side (the back side in FIG. 71) on the protruding surface.

  The groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612, and the inner diameter of the groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of a rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger. The pair of concave grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back side (the front side in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding unit cover 5628 provided with both ends, the bar member 5625 can be disposed on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

  The shaft portion 5612k is a projection serving as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670 described later, and is disposed at a symmetrical position about a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

  The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the lower side to the back side of the central opening 5612h. The pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

  The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is changed into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the central opening of the base member 610 (central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position where it cannot be seen from the front side of the projection unit 5600 in the assembled state. The rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72). Thereby, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

  In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the center.

  The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). Yes, and formed on the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

  The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for preventing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and is opened long in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. Thereby, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back surface base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slid. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

  Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar bar member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a rectangular shape in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 across the bar member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is disposed.

  The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. The projection plate member 5620 is interposed between the projection plate members 5620.

  The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. A rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the projection plate member 5620 and the member 5620.

  The front cover 5626 includes a groove portion 5626a that is recessed in the front side (the rear side in FIG. 72) on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620 and recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section. The recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set larger than the outer diameter size of the rod member 5625. Is done.

  Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be slidably displaced in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the bar member 5625.

  Further, the bar member 5625 is disposed on the back side with respect to the front side surface of the front cover 5626. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a concave portion on the projection plate member 5620.

  Here, if the bar member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, a groove for inserting the bar member 5625 needs to be formed on the back side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern or pattern shape. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel as much as the thickness dimension is reduced, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed on the front cover 5626 in which the rod member 5625 is disposed without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light entering the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

  Further, as described above, since both ends of the rod member 5625 are disposed on the front base 5612 so as not to drop off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

  Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

  In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged in a substantially linear shape along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is connected to the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It arrange | positions in the position which opposes. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be raised.

  In addition, the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed is formed with a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view on the back side (the front side in FIG. 71). The bulging part 5612n is a part for raising the first block 653 to the back side, and the raising dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Accordingly, a rotation member 5670 described later can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

  Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and being sandwiched between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611.

  A rotation member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

  The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent in an L shape when viewed from the front. The rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612 in a state where the bent portion is positioned on the center side in the left-right direction, and the irradiation unit on one side of the long side. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

  The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotation member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, the rotation member 5670 can rotate around the shaft portion 5612 k with respect to the front base 5612.

  Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotation member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

  The rotating member 5670 is urged in a direction to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. 5612 is disposed. Further, a displacement restricting protrusion 5612j that protrudes to the back side is formed below the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

  The displacement restricting projection 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the rear end of the projecting tip is disposed on the front base 5612 (on the back base 5611 side). In addition to being positioned, it is formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670. As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is displaced by the displacement regulating projection. Blocking by 5612j can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

  FIG. 75A is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75B is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed at a substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening 5612h, the rotation disposed on both sides in the left and right directions. The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown), and one end side is displaced downward. Accordingly, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted to the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides (the left and right sides in FIG. 74A) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 correspondingly. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projector can be increased, and the pattern and design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When slid in the right direction in the front view (right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 coupled to the rack 5627 is similarly slid in the right direction (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). Thus, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

  In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front surface side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shape of the rotation member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thereby, a rotational moment in a direction in which one end side is pushed upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as a rotating shaft. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left and right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

  As a result, in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is displaced to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern and design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player interest.

  Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the LED disposed at another position is turned on in accordance with the displacement, so that the amount of light of the projection plate member is kept constant. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, and the reliability of the product decreases. In addition, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is disposed at another position.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and disposed at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in order to irradiate light to the irradiated body (projection plate member) to be displaced, a plurality of fixed irradiated bodies (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated body, and the irradiation range of each irradiated body There was a problem that a weak part of the light amount was formed during this period, and when the irradiated object was displaced, light and darkness was produced, which lowered the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiation bodies. However, in this case, the number of the irradiation bodies to be arranged increases, so that the product cost increases. There was a point.

  However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of the displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the brightness of the light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

  Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 is applied to the projection plate member 5620. The driving for sliding displacement and the driving for rotating the second block 654 can be used together, and it is not necessary to newly provide driving means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed from an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced as a separate member. Therefore, after the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is disposed on the front base 5612, the irradiation unit 650 can be disposed on the front base by connecting the wiring, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

  On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

  In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side of which one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) is projected by an unillustrated urging spring interposed between the front base 5612 and the projection plate. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. In addition, as described above, the rotation member 5670 displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j, so that the rotation range thereof is restricted.

  The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 is only detailed as the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are reversed left and right as described above. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75B and 76B).

  Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible from the player has been described. However, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible from the player. It is possible to arrange.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member disposed so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that makes light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed on a face between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

  The front base 6612 is formed with a shield member 6612r having a ring shape when viewed from the front at the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and an opening opening in a fan shape in the front-rear direction in a part of the shield member 6612r. A portion 6612p is formed.

  The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in a front view annular shape. The shield member 6612r is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side of the front view.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 and in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p. Are stacked between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of both the bases 611 and 612.

  Projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of annular base surface base 6612. Projection plate member 6620 is disposed coaxially with the axis of front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is disposed so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed on the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be prevented from deteriorating accordingly.

  Projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is visually recognized by the player through opening 6612p of front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and the front base 6612 is formed. The player is made to visually recognize through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

  In addition, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflection portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light therein. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose interior is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is formed by dividing a plurality of patterns, designs, etc. in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. The In the present embodiment, the shape of the reflective portion 6622 such as the pattern or symbol is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection regions 6622a to 6622f of six patterns or symbols are formed (see FIG. 80). .

  Further, the projection plate member 6620 is provided with a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back side and the front side, respectively. Thus, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), whereby the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80A to 80C are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80A to 80C show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 illustrates a state where the rear base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection part 6622 (reflection areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in a state where the projection plate member 6620 is disposed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in a front view (viewed from the back of the page). A reflective region 6622a is disposed. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or design of the reflective region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols that appear inside the opening 6612p.

  In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also applied to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but the front base 6612 is disposed in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f. The display of the regions 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or design of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest is impaired because other regions can be visually recognized. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 80B and 80C, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and symbols of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and symbols can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

  Here, when a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated body is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the irradiated body is switched. 6612p), the pattern or design of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before switching the pattern or design, so that the player There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

  Even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the irradiated object is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated object, the irradiated object may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lamps in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and design of the irradiated object can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620, thereby making the transparent state. be able to. Therefore, when the projection plate member 6620 is rotated, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the projection plate member 6620. Therefore, the projection plate member 6620 is compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 slides. The space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of 6612.

  That is, when the projection plate member 6620 slides and displaces, the arrangement space in the left and right or up and down directions is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the number of patterns and figures on the projection plate member 6620. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and symbols.

  Next, the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65a are formed in the winning port unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. The front side of the paper 10 will be described as the front side (or front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, a winning slot unit 930 and a pitching unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. 82, illustration of units other than the prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) disposed on the base plate 60 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the center opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

  The through-hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, in a front view, and the drive unit 960 and the specific prize opening unit 950 disposed in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

  The base board 60 is provided with a prize opening unit 930 from the game area (front side) side, and a ball feeding unit 970 is provided from the side opposite to the game area (back side), and is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 will be described later.

  Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

  As shown in FIG. 83 to FIG. 86, the winning a prize opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning a prize opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front side of FIG. 83 (b)) of the front unit 940, A drive unit 960 disposed on the back surface (front side of FIG. 83B) of the specific prize opening unit 950 and a displacement member 966 disposed between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are mainly used. Formed in preparation.

  As described above, the front unit 940 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is larger than the through hole 60 a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 are other than the passage paths of the game balls (first winning port 64, second winning port 140, and specific winning port 65a) formed in the front unit 940 described later. Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

  Part of the specific prize opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific prize opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and a game ball can be sent to the inside of the specific prize opening unit 950 through the specific prize opening 65a. Is done. A detailed description of the specific prize opening unit 950 will be described later.

  The drive unit 960 is disposed on the back side of the specific prize opening unit 950, and a part thereof (the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is disposed on the wing member 945 disposed on the front unit via the displacement member 966. Connected. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated and the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 will be described in detail. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In FIGS. 87A and 87B, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is indicated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and a front base 943 disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. And two (a pair of) wing members 945 disposed in a rotatable manner between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

  The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while having an outer shape in a front view that is substantially T-shaped. The back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and the base plate 60 penetrates through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

  The back base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by cutting out on the flow-down side of the game ball (the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) and the upper side of the first out-port 71 (FIG. 87 ( b) A specific winning port 65a that is located in the upper side and is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the horizontal direction, a second winning port 140 that is formed to penetrate above the specific winning port 65a, and the first out port 71. And a first winning opening 64 formed by cutting out at the side edge.

  Further, the back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the thickness direction on the outer edge portion. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper) to the back side (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper), and from the back side to the front side. The second through hole 941a2 is reduced in diameter.

  The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw. Is done. Moreover, since the 1st through-hole 941a1 is diameter-reduced and formed toward the back side from the front side as mentioned above, the head part of a tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter part of a front side. Therefore, the head of the tapping screw can be prevented from protruding into the game area. Further, a positioning protrusion 942a is formed in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1 so as to protrude from the back surface of the back surface base 941 in a cylindrical shape.

  The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. The Thereby, the back surface base 941 (winning hole unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

  The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state in which the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

  Moreover, since the 2nd through-hole 941a2 is diameter-reduced and formed toward the front side from the back side as mentioned above, the head part of a screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter part on the back side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding to the back side of the back base 941. As a result, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific prize opening unit 950 when a specific prize opening unit 950 described later is disposed on the back side of the back base 941.

  The rear base 941 has an outer shape at the lower end in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. A01) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the notch bottom (the edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the specific winning port 65a and the general winning port 63 (). The game balls that have not flowed into any of them can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))) through the first out port 71.

  The first winning port 64 is formed by cutting out an end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87 (b)) opposite to the first out port 71 into a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed such that the inner edge is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball flowing into the inside of a first receiving portion 941g to be described later can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning port 64.

  At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941g that protrudes toward the game area (front side of FIG. 87 (a) and is formed in a cup shape) and the opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87 ( b) A first throwing portion 942g protruding in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the drawing.

  The 1st receiving part 941g is formed in the magnitude | size which can receive the game ball for 1 ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) can be caused to flow into the first receiving portion 941g.

  The first receiving portion 941g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941g can be sent to the back side (the first pitching portion 942g side) through the first winning port 64.

  Further, the first receiving portion 941g is directed from the upper ends of both ends of the base plate 60 in the short direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 87) toward the second prize opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))). The base plate 60 is provided with a guide portion 941g1 that is inclined and inclined to the outside in the short direction. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and a side surface opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the 1st receiving part 941g can be improved, and it can control that the game ball which flows down the flow-down area collides with the 1st receiving part 941g, and the 1st receiving part 941g is damaged.

  In addition, if the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, there is not enough game nails to change the game balls flowing down the game area. It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be impaired. By causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. .

  Further, since the guide portion 941g1 is formed to be inclined toward the second winning opening 140 side toward the outer side in the short side direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)), a game that collides with the guide portion 941g1. The sphere can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, it can be made to collide again with the game nail (not shown) arrange | positioned at the base board 60, and it can make it easy to give a change to the flow direction of a game ball. Therefore, it can suppress that a player's interest is impaired.

  The first pitching portion 942g is formed in a U-shape that is open on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the opposing inner edges is larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first ball-throwing portion 942g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (opposite to the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))), and the protruding tip side is a ball-throwing unit described later. It abuts against the edge of the inflow port 982d of 970. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first pitching portion 942g from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g via the first winning port 64 can be rolled to the back side and sent to the pitching unit 970.

  The first ball feeding portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which an upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball feeding unit 970 described later is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first pitching unit 942g and the pitching unit 970 will be described later.

  The second winning opening 140 is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in a front view, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball sent between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))) through the second winning opening 140.

  The second winning prize opening 140 has a front side wall portion 941b projecting to the front side (the game area side (the front side of FIG. 87 (a))) and the back side (the opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87). (B) the second ball-throwing portion 942c protruding to the front side of the paper surface)) is formed.

  The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that the protruding front end surface thereof comes into contact with a ball feeding guide portion 943d of the front base 943 described later.

  The second ball-throwing portion 942c is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear at each of both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140. The second pitching portion 942c is set to have a dimension in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87 (b)) larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which rolls the rolling part 943a of the front base 943 mentioned later falls from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

  The pair of second ball feeding portions 942c has a short dimension of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later in terms of a distance dimension between the opposing sides in the short direction of the base plate 60 (left and right direction in FIG. 87 (b)). It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (left and right direction in FIG. 87 (b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside. In addition, the second ball-throwing portion 942c is formed by notching a second concave portion 942c1 on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the protruding tip. The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

  The rear base 941 is directed to the other side in the gravity direction near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (the upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) from the game area side of the back base 941 to the opposite side to the game area. A first shaft hole 941d that is recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e that are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and are formed through the back base 941, and A projecting portion 941c that projects between the first guide wall 942b that is located on the outer side in the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and projects on the back side, and the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. And formed with.

  The first shaft hole 941d can support a shaft member 945a that supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

  The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as an axis. The first opening 941e can be inserted through the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing | blade member 945 rotates, it can suppress that protrusion 945b contact | abuts to the inner surface of the 1st opening 941e.

  The protrusion 941c is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portion are positioned on substantially the same plane as the center position between facing wing members 945 described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension is set slightly larger than the dimension between the facing wing members 945 in the closed state. The Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in a closed state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being sent to the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

  The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when a later-described displacement member 966 is displaced, and the distance between the pair of first guide walls 942b is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction of 966.

  Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view, and extends in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protrusion 966a of the displacement member 966 is brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, so that the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

  The specific prize opening 65a is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the facing direction of the pair of wing members 945 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)), and a plate member 951 of a specific prize opening unit 950, which will be described later, inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area can be sent to the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

  The back base 941 surrounds the periphery of the specific winning opening 65a, and is erected from the back side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a and standing portions 942f that are erected on the back side (opposite to the game area). And a recessed portion 941h provided.

  The standing portion 942f is set to have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific prize opening unit 950 described later. Thereby, it is possible to easily position and arrange the specific winning opening unit 950 inside the standing portion 942f.

  The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the bar member 952 serving as the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning unit 950 is inserted in the state where the specific winning unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the bar member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end face of the bar member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the stick member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

  Furthermore, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second ball-throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (b)). And a second guide wall 942d projecting upward).

  The bulging portion 942h bulges to the back side of the back surface base 941, and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second ball feeding portion 942c. Accordingly, when a later-described displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) is disposed on the back side of the back surface base 941 (FIG. 87 (b) on the front side of the paper surface), the displacement member 966 is disposed between the back surface of the back surface base 941. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

  The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the opposing pair of second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance dimension of the displacement member 966 in the short direction. Is set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the short direction of the displacement member 966 can be restricted.

  The rear base 941 is halfway toward the one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) at the edge of the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction) of the specific winning opening 65a. A second out port 941f formed by cutting out into a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side (the side opposite to the game area) of the base plate 60. It is formed in a shape larger than the diameter.

  In addition, a third ball-throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U shape in rear view and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball sent to the back side via the inner side of the second out port 941f can be sent to the inner side of the third pitching part 942e.

  The third ball throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-view in back view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball sent from the second out port 941f Can be rolled to the back side. Note that a detailed description of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third throwing portion 942e will be described later.

  The front base 943 is formed in a substantially T-shape that is upside down and whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. The front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

  The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a that protrude from positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the back base 941 described above. It is formed.

  The 2nd receiving part 943c is formed in back view substantially U character, and the 2nd prize opening 140 of back base 941 is arranged inside in front view. In addition, a pair of wing members 945 described later is disposed on the open side (the open side of the U shape) of the second receiving portion 943c. Furthermore, the protruding distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be sent between the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between a pair of wing members 945 described later. it can.

  The second receiving portion 943c includes a ball feeding guide portion 943d that protrudes inward from the inner edge thereof, and a first concave portion that is recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of FIG. 87 (b)). 943ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion to the back base side.

  A pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945 (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)). Further, the pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portion 941b of the back surface base 941, and when the back surface base 941 and the front surface base 943 are combined, the end surfaces thereof come into contact with each other. . Thereby, the game ball that has flowed in between the facing of the pair of wing members 945 can be sent between the facing of the pitching guide portion 943d.

  The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (the lower side in the gravitational direction) between the facing of the pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravitational direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the recess 941j in a state in which the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the back of the back base 941. It protrudes to the side (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper).

  Thereby, the game balls sent between the pair of ball-sending guide portions 943d can be sent to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game balls are rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1, so that the back side of the back base 941 Can be sent to.

  The front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941 on the opening side (the upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b includes a second shaft hole 943b1 on the inner edge thereof, and the other end of a shaft member 945a that supports a blade member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

  The third receiving portion 944a is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the back, and the second out port 941f of the back surface base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be caused to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a can be returned to the back surface via the second out port 941f. The ball can be sent to the side (opposite the game area).

  The second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a have a first recess 943ca and a second recess 944a1 that are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)). The first concave portion 943ca and the second concave portion 944a1 are fastened portions to which screws inserted into the second through holes 941a2 described above are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Is done. Thereby, the back surface base 941 and the front surface base 943 can be fastened.

  A pair of wing members 945 are disposed with a second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 941 interposed therebetween in front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

  The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than the distance between the rear base 941 and the front base 943. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed so as to penetrate in the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the back base 941 side surface (back surface).

  The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the wing member 945 can be rotated and the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are rotated. It can be disposed between the opposing surfaces. Accordingly, the wing member 945 can be displaced in a closed state in which the opposite side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the opposite direction.

  The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission portion that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945. The tip of the protrusion 945b is disposed through the first opening 941e of the back base 941. The size is set so as to protrude to the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the game area). A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

  Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

  The displacement member 966 is formed from a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966 c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 90B) at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is disposed inside. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the opposite side to the game area via the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

  The displacement member 966 includes a projecting portion 966a projecting from one end side (the upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 90 (a) up and down direction) and the lateral direction (FIG. 90 (a) in the left and right direction) And a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (the lower side in FIG. 90B) to the back side (the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction of the displacement member 966, and a contact portion 966a1 that is located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 966 and extends in the longitudinal direction. Is provided.

  The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the projection 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 is set to have a width dimension larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, the protrusions 945b can be prevented from coming into contact with both inner surfaces facing the width direction of the sliding groove 966a2 and the operation of the wing member 945 being restricted.

  The contact part 966a1 is formed to bulge on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side). Thereby, the area which the displacement member 966 contacts with the front base 943 and the drive unit 960 described later can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

  The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge to the back side (the back base 941 side), and a horizontally-long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the back view. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a distal end (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the distal end of the transmission member 965. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

  The connection hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to the one-side contacted portion 966b2 on the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90A)). And the other-side abutted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

  The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface with which a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965 described later contacts. The displacing member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to an open state (see FIG. 92) by sliding the bulged portion 965e1 in contact with the one-side contacted portion 966b2.

  The other-side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface with which the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 described later contacts. The displacement member 966 displaces the wing member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91) by causing the other side abutted portion 966b3 to come into contact with the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 and slidingly displace. Can do.

  Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. 91 illustrates a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 illustrates an open state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed in parallel with the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly includes a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 that is continuous with the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (on the side of the specific winning opening 65a), and a second surface 945b2 that is continuous with the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

  The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (the connection hole 966b1 side), contacts the protrusion 945b, displaces the wing member 945 to the open state, and faces and projects the lower inner surface 966a4. An upper inner surface 966a3 that contacts the 945b to displace the wing member 945 in a closed state, and an inner side in the short direction of the displacement member 966 from the outer side in the short direction (left and right direction in FIG. 91) of the displacement member 966 toward the lower inner surface 966a4 side. And an inclined surface 966a5 which is inclined in the direction.

  The displacement member 966 is arranged to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the rear base 941 by a transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific prize opening 65a (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second prize opening 140 (upper side in FIG. 91). Opened.

  Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is disposed inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is disposed on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside in the short direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 contacts the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact therewith. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

  Here, a entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and that open or close the entrance opening, and the pair of 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is coupled to a projecting portion that projects from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, a facing portion is formed on one end side of the rotating member so as to be opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and a protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the projecting portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the facing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable because it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion. That is, when the rotating member is rotated for the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing interval of the facing portion is equal to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the protruding portion interferes between the opposing portions, and the rotating member cannot be rotated. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing interval between the facing portions so that the projecting portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion increases accordingly. As a result, since the shakiness of the wing member is likely to occur, the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. The projection 945b protrudes from the pair of wing members 945, and the slide groove 966a2 into which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the slide groove 966a2 The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a slide displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b. Therefore, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space necessary for disposing the displacement member in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, a space for disposing other members can be secured.

  Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965. At the time of operation in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (the other side in the direction of gravity), the inertial force increases as the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state and displacing the wing member 945 to the open state or the closed state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is on the lower side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation shaft (the insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Be positioned. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravitational direction (the other side in the gravitational direction) is set below the rotational direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. Thereby, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) can be started and the initial operation when opening or closing can be performed smoothly.

  Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b across the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c). Thereby, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravitational direction (one side in the gravitational direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (self-weight). Can be made. Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) can be started and the initial operation when opening can be performed smoothly.

  Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set below the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The slide displacement toward the other side in the gravity direction 966 (upward in the gravity direction) can be started smoothly.

  Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b to the inclined surface 966a5. In addition to the displacement of the projection 945b in the gravity direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 in the closed state can be easily suppressed. In other words, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration accompanying the flow of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning port 140 side to the specific winning port 65a side (gravity direction one side (lower side in FIG. 92). Side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 contacts the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

  Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning port 140 side to the specific winning port 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when closing the wing | blade member 945, the wing | blade member 945 can be displaced using the dead weight of the displacement member 966. FIG. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

  Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

  93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion 963, and a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion that are formed in a box shape and disposed to face each other. A solenoid 610 disposed in a space between the first and second housings 963, a coupling member 964 coupled to the solenoid 610, and pivotally supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and coupled to the coupling member 964. The transmission member 965 is mainly provided.

  The first housing portion 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers a cover 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in FIG. 93 (a)), and the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover 962a. And a guide portion 962b projecting to the reference).

  The covering portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. The covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

  The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages an engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963 described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. Accordingly, the engagement portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 are fastened, and thus the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 are engaged. The workability of fastening with can be improved.

  The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 in the assembled state of the drive unit 960, and on the second housing portion 963 side (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). A through hole 962da penetrating in the direction is provided.

  The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and has an inner diameter larger than that of the fastening hole 963b1. Formed. Thereby, the 1st accommodating part 962 and the 2nd accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed.

  The guide portion 962b is connected to the opposing wall surface of the covering portion 962a and is connected to the pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L shape in a side view, and the pair of arm portions 962e. The wall portion 962f is formed, and a projecting portion 962g that projects from the wall portion 962f on the side opposite to the covering portion 962a (on the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a to the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) and bends the protruding tip side to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. In addition, the pair of arms 962e is set so that the distance between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance between both ends in the horizontal direction of a side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the sorting unit 980 described later. The part 981b is inserted.

  The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces on the distal end side (bending side) of the arm portion 962e described above, and has a shape in front view that is larger than the shape in front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93B) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B), and the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back surface base 941 described above. Is set to be approximately the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) (L3 = L4). Further, the wall 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93A) in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 93A) of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 from the upper end surface of the standing portion 942f. It is set substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5 = L6). Accordingly, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be disposed between the facing portions.

  The protruding portion 962g is formed so as to protrude from the outside in the opposite direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f to the opposite side of the arm portion 962e. It is set to be approximately the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the inner dimension L7 in the facing direction of the projecting portion 962g (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. It is set large. Further, the projecting portion 962g is set such that the dimension in the gravity direction is substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the upright portion 942f facing each other.

  Thus, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is disposed on the rear base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protruding portions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the back surface base 941 by inserting the projecting portion 962g between the facing portions 942f.

  The second housing portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box-like body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). The second housing portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction of the solenoid 610, which will be described later (left and right direction in FIG. 93B), when viewed from above. In addition, the second storage portion 963 includes a concave portion 963e that is recessed at a plurality of locations on both wall portions that extend in the longitudinal direction, and the first storage portion 962 side between the plurality of concave portions 963e. Engaging portion 963c projecting in the longitudinal direction, projecting portion 963b projecting in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85) ) And a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

  The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude in a semicircular arc shape on the outer side in the short direction of the second housing portion 963, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first housing portion 962. Accordingly, the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 962da of the first housing portion 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

  The recessed portion 963e is an opening through which air is circulated in a space formed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be cooled.

  The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes toward the first housing portion 962 from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side, and a tip thereof is bent inward in the lateral direction of the second housing portion 963. The Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first housing portion 962, and when the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first housing portion 962.

  Moreover, since the engaging part 963c is formed between the recessed parts 963e, the distance from the base end of the engaging part 963c to a front-end | tip can be lengthened. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first housing portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first housing portion 962.

  The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotation shaft 965c of a transmission member 965 described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first housing portion 962 side is covered with the side surface of the first housing portion 962 on the one side in the gravity direction, and the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are combined. In such a state, it is possible to suppress the rotation shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off the bearing portion 963d.

  The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted inside the main body 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body 961a, and the shaft 961b opposite to the main body 961a. Provided with an annular part 961c disposed at the end of the coil part and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular part 961c and the main body part 961a.

  The main body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body portion 961a can be pulled inward by the magnetism and inserted.

  The shaft portion 961b is formed of a metal material having magnetism and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is disposed in a direction in which the axial direction is directed toward the back surface base 941, and a portion on the back surface base 941 side is disposed in a state of protruding from the main body portion 961a.

  The annular portion 961c is disposed at an end portion of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964 described later is connected to the annular portion 961c. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

  The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound a plurality of times in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the opposed portions of the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. Thereby, the annular part 961c can be urged in the direction away from the main body part 961a. Therefore, in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is interrupted (supplied), the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

  The connecting member 964 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the back surface base 941 side from the other side in the gravity direction of the base portion 964a (FIG. 85). And a standing portion 964b bent to the side.

  The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c from the end surface on one side in the gravity direction (FIG. 93 (b) the back side of the drawing surface). And a second recessed portion 964d which is located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and is recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

  The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape that opens on one side in the gravity direction in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

  As described above, the second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c. In addition, it is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, and is opened from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

  The standing portion 964b includes an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, and a protruding portion 965d of a transmission member 965 described later is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. Thus, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the projecting portion 965d abuts on the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

  The transmission member 965 is bent in a side view, and has a distal end portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotation extending to the connecting member 964 side while continuing to the distal end portion 965a. Part 965b.

  The rotating part 965b is formed such that the width dimension in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) of the second accommodating part 963 is smaller than the dimension between the opposed bearing parts 963d formed on the second accommodating part 963. Is done. The rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides in the short side direction (FIG. 93 (b) vertical direction) of the second housing portion 963 at the end portion on the 964 side, and the radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. And a projecting portion 965d projecting toward one end in the direction of gravity.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 965c is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965 c, the separation distance between the projecting tips is set to be larger than the distance between the opposed bearing portions 963 d formed in the second housing portion 963. Thereby, a pair of rotating shaft 965c can be inserted and arrange | positioned inside the bearing part 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second housing portion 963 and the first housing portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable about the rotating shaft 965c.

  As described above, the protruding portion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in a top view. Further, the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in a state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is supplied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). It is set to be sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to twice the width dimension of the protruding portion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d and the insertion holes 964e on both end surfaces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with each other to restrict the rotation of the transmission member 965. Can be suppressed.

  The distal end portion 965a is formed such that the width dimension in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the distal end, and a standing portion 965f protruding from the connection side with the rotation portion 965b to one side in the gravity direction. Formed with.

  The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted into the connection hole 966b1. Accordingly, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

  Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93 (b). In FIG. 96 (a), the state before the operation of the solenoid 610 is illustrated, and in FIG. 96 (b), the state after the operation of the solenoid 610 is illustrated. In FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is indicated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 provided between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96 (a)).

  When the connecting member 964 is pushed away from the main body 961a, the surface on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96 (a)) of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 and the solenoid 610 side of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964. It is set as the state which contacted the inner surface of. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96 (a)) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 toward the one side in the gravity direction is restricted by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when power is applied (supplied) to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the body portion 961a by the magnetic force generated in the body portion 961a. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (as compared to a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction approaching the main body portion 961a (the right side in FIG. 96 (a)).

  When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 opposite to the solenoid 610 (left side in FIG. 96 (b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 are inserted. The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 96B) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 96 (b)) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravitational direction is restricted by the connection portion between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first housing portion 962.

  Accordingly, when the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodation portion 962 or the second accommodation portion 963. It can be made to contact. Thereby, a player's cheating can be suppressed.

  For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first storage portion 962 or the second storage portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is increased. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Accordingly, an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 that is displaced by the transmission member 965, so that it is easy for the store operator to find the fraud.

  Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 extends from the rotation shaft 965c and is connected to the displacement member 966, and the transmission member 965 extends from the rotation shaft 965c and is connected to the solenoid 610. The distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed to be bent in a substantially U shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

  That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of this embodiment. When the distance between the rotating portion 965b and the rotation member 965b is set to be approximately equal to the distance, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is increased, The whole becomes larger.

  On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed from the axial direction of the rotation shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of this embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be approximately the same (the distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be equal to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes small.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed to be bent in a substantially square shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 is changed. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while securing the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back side (the right side in FIG. 96 (a)) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b on the opposite side to the displacement member 966. Accordingly, the space generated by bending the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively used to reduce the size of the transmission member 965. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently disposed in the space between the rolling portion 943a (a ball feeding unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific prize opening unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. Can be achieved.

  Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 98A shows a state before the solenoid 610 operates, and FIG. 98B shows a state after the solenoid 610 operates.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the state where the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

  Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in FIG. 98 (a)), FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-side abutted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 abut, and the displacement member 966 slides to the other side in the gravity direction. Is done.

  As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, the wing member 945 is opened by applying power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

  On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is interrupted, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is made uniform in the direction of gravity by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. It is displaced to the side (the lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact with each other so that the displacement member 966 moves to one side in the gravity direction. The slide is displaced.

  As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the one side in the direction of gravity (the specific prize opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, the wing member 945 is closed by interrupting the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

  In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed in a state where power supply (supply) to the main body portion 961a is cut off, the main body portion 961a can be closed due to disconnection of the wiring of the main body portion 961a or a player's illegal act. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being in an open state and a state where the game ball easily flows into the second winning opening 140.

  Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connection hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the transmission member. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

  That is, during the operation of sliding the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, only one of the pair of wing members 945 receives a load from the game ball. When acted, the position of the displacement member 966 is changed, so that the displacement member 966 is coupled to the pair of wing members 945 at two locations and also to the transmission member 965 at two locations. If this is the case, it is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and resistance when the displacement member 966 is slid and displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated). Occurring and inhibiting the opening or closing of the wing member. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two locations and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one location. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

  Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface between the one-side contacted part 966b2 and the other-side contacted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum outer dimension D2 (FIG. 98) of the protrusion 945b. It is set to be smaller than 3 times (see (a)). Thereby, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 are When the change in the posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted, the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set to be smaller than three times the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. It can control that change is regulated. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

  The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, it is possible to easily suppress the contact between the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

  Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific prize opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific prize opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific prize opening unit 950. FIG. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific prize opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific prize opening unit 950.

  As shown in FIG. 99 to FIG. 101, the specific prize opening unit 950 includes a ball entry member 953 formed in a box-like body that is opened on the player side (the front side in FIG. 99), and the ball entry member 953 is opened. A plate member 951 disposed so as to cover the portion, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951 are provided. It is formed.

  The plate member 951 is formed from a colored translucent resin material, and allows a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body 951a formed in a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a shaft hole 951b that is cylindrically formed on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a, and a longitudinal direction of the main body 951a. A protrusion 951c protruding from the one end of the main body 951a toward the incoming ball member 953 and an engaging portion 951d protruding from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the incoming ball member 953 are formed.

  The main body 951a is formed to have a size that covers the open side of a ball entry member 953, which will be described later, in a front view, and is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

  The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the main body 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. The shaft hole 951b is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of a rod member 952 described later, and the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the incoming ball member 953 by supporting the incoming ball member 953 in a state where the bar member 952 is inserted into the axial hole 951b.

  The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by driving a drive unit 957 described later and the other side in the gravitational direction of the plate member 951 is inclined to the game area side, the main body 951a It can suppress that the game ball which flowed down falls from one side of the longitudinal direction of the main-body part 951a.

  The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to a tip 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, on the inside thereof, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the flow-down region, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body 951a can be removed from the main body 951a. It can suppress falling from the other side of the longitudinal direction.

  The ball entry member 953 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a box shape that is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, a standing wall 953b that is erected on the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f protruding from the opposite surface, an annular protrusion 953c protruding in an annular shape on the opposite surface of the main body 953a, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d protruding from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion toward the plate member 951; an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a; A projecting portion 953g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a projection 953h projecting from the open side edge of the main body portion 953a to the plate member 951 side, and two positions formed through the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a With an inlet 953j It is.

  The main body portion 953a is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into a box-shaped inner portion, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball flowing from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in a front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. Accordingly, the main body portion 953a (the incoming ball member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

  Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the separation distance on the outer side in the opposing direction of the pair of wing members 945 described above. Thereby, even if the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of wing members 945, the game ball can be flowed into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

  The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape that is larger than the diameter of the game ball. When the plate member 951 is opened, the game ball can flow into the main body 953a through the opening 953a1. it can.

  The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge on the lower side in the gravity direction of the main body portion 953a, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, a game ball sent from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

  The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the side opposite to the opening side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer circumferential surface in the three directions of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the back. Formed in size.

  The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. Accordingly, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. In addition, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the standing wall 953b at a distal end portion that is separated from the proximal end side by a distance corresponding to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it can suppress that detection device SE1 and engagement part 953f engage, and detection device SE1 arrange | positioned at the main-body part 953a falls off.

  The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed so as to be biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the back, and the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is provided on one side. The detection hole SE1a is disposed at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j described later, and allows a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass therethrough.

  The annular protrusion 953c is formed to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the opposite side to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed to the inner edge portion thereof.

  A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and a distance dimension between the facing portions is formed to be shorter than a longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d.

  The wall 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 penetrating in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction of the main body 953a (the left-right direction in FIG. 99 (a)). The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after the plate member 951 is disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951, thereby It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

  Furthermore, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a projecting dimension that is smaller than the recessed distance of the recessed portion 941h formed in the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Accordingly, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming out.

  The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955 described later is inserted to the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955. Is done.

  The protruding portion 953g is formed to protrude on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connection projection 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the projecting portion 953g are arranged on the same axis. The installation portion 953g and the connection protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other. Thereby, the specific winning a prize mouth unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning a prize mouth unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

  The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude to the plate member 951 side. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to be sandwiched between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body portion 953a.

  Further, the protrusion 953h is formed at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 99 (a)) of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be hardly sandwiched between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

  The inflow port 953j is formed to open from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow ports 953j are holes through which the game balls that flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a are sent to the passage member 955, and are formed as a pair in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

  Here, a game provided with a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance The machine is known. The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that enter the entrance are collected on the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member Into the ball one by one. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to arrive at the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and there is a problem that over winning is likely to occur. It was.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since a pair of inlets 953j are formed at a predetermined interval (in two places), even when the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged, the inlets 953j The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inlet 953j can be shortened and the inlet 953j can be made to flow in a short time. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the detection device SE1 that detects the inflow of the game ball into the ball entering member 953 is disposed at a connection portion between the inflow port 953j and a recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 is disposed between the pair of inlets 953j.

  Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 (the pair of wing members 945) in the gravity direction. In addition, since the pair of wing members 945 are disposed in the game area, it is difficult for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow down to the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945. Accordingly, there is a bias in the inflow position of the game ball that flows into the ball entry member 953 of the specific prize opening unit 950. In the present embodiment, as described above, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, so that the inflow of game balls flowing into the incoming ball member 953 is large. The inflow port 953j can be approached. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can be flowed into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the over winning of the game ball to the ball entering member 953.

  The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and the outer shape in front view is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape in front view of the above-described entrance member 953. The passage member 955 includes a pair of recessed portions 955a that are recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of the respective detection devices SE1, and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A second opening 955b penetrating in the longitudinal direction, a pair of third openings 955c penetrating from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entering member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and concave in the gravitational other side of the third opening 955c. The rolling part 955d is provided, and a second recessed part 955f is provided between the pair of recessed parts 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

  The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is done.

  The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of a drive unit 957 described later are disposed. In addition, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that protrudes in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

  The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity is disposed, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in front view. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be disposed inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 protrudes toward the ball entry member 953 in a state where the detection device SE2 is disposed inside the third opening 955c.

  Further, an engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The projecting tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

  The rolling portion 955d is formed to be curved in an arc shape. Further, the end of the rolling member 955d on the side of the plate member 951 is coupled to the third ball feeding portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific prize opening unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning unit 950.

  The other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the number of game balls flowing into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

  As described above, the second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a serving as a passage for the game ball. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99 (c)) of the passage member 955 is the second dimension of the drive unit 960 described above. It is set larger than the distance dimension in the short direction (up and down direction in FIG. 93 (b)) of the accommodating portion 963.

  The second recessed portion 955 f is formed with an insertion hole 955 h that is formed through the passage member 955 in the middle in the longitudinal direction, and a projection 955 g that protrudes toward the drive unit 957. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw that fastens the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

  The protrusion 955g is formed in a columnar shape, and a fastening hole 955g1 is formed in a circular recess at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific prize opening unit 950), and is opposed to the long hole 963f formed in the second housing portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed in the position to do. Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the channel | path member 955 (specific winning a prize port unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

  The drive unit 957 includes a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c that is disposed at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

  The solenoid 957a includes a main body portion 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the main body portion 957a1. Provided with an annular portion 957a3 disposed at an end of the coil portion and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

  The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body portion 957a1 by the magnetism can be pulled inside the main body portion 957a1 and inserted. Is done.

  The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a metal material having magnetism and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is disposed in a state in which the axial direction is directed toward the passage member 955, and a part on the back surface base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 957a1.

  The annular portion 957a3 is disposed at the end portion of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

  The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the opposed portions of the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. Thereby, the annular part 957a3 can be urged in a direction away from the main body part 957a1. Therefore, in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. In addition, after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body 957a1 when the application (supply) of power is interrupted.

  The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. The case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2 and an opening 957b2 penetratingly formed on the opposite side to the open side.

  The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

  The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Accordingly, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 through the opening 957b2.

  The connecting member 957c is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c includes a first recessed portion 957c1 that is recessed from the end surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 99 (b)) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. 957c1 includes a second recessed portion 957c2 that is located on the solenoid 957a side and is recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 that protrudes toward the ball entry member 953.

  The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is opened in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

  The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. In addition, it is formed in a substantially U shape that opens in one side in the direction of gravity in the rear view, and is formed to open from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

  The engaging portion 957c3 is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape in a side view. The engaging portion 957c3 is provided with a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958 described later inside the bent portion. Thus, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

  The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the side. The transmission member 958 includes a shaft hole 958b penetrating circularly in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a protruding in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from an end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion protruding to the plate member 951 side. 958c.

  As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. The shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

  As described above, the connecting portion 958a is disposed inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. Thus, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

  The front end portion 958c is inserted and disposed in the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the distal end portion 958c is displaced, and thus the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

  Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific prize opening unit 950 along the line CII-CII in FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific prize opening unit 950. FIG.

  102 (a) and 103 (a) illustrate the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) illustrate the open state of the plate member 951. Further, the closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the incoming ball member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is the main body portion 951a in the main body of the incoming ball member 953. This is a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), when the application (supply) of power to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is interrupted, the shaft 957a2 is made to be a plate member by the urging force of the coil spring SP2. It is in a state of projecting to the 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed in the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also disposed on the plate member 951 side that is separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

  In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so that the connecting portion 958a is pushed out to the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in a direction rotating around the shaft hole 958b toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)).

  When the front end portion 958c is pushed down to the one side in the direction of gravity, the front end portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. To be rotated. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in a closed state.

  When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player performs an illegal operation to forcefully release the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connection member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized operation force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), in a state where power is applied (supplied) to the body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the body 957a1. It is assumed that Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed in the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

  In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so that the main body portion 958a1 side is displaced with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. (Right side of FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force in the direction of rotating the distal end portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b to the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 102 (b)) is transmitted to the transmission member 965.

  When the distal end portion 958c is pushed up in the other direction of gravity, the distal end portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entry member 953. It is rotated in the direction to do. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be opened.

  Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the weight of the plate member 951, and therefore the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. It can suppress that force is applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, an inner portion of the main body 953a of the ball entering member 953 will be described. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific prize opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific prize opening unit 950 along the line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104 (a). 104A shows a state where the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104B shows a state where the plate member 951 is attached. 104 (a) and 104 (b) show the closed state of the plate member 951.

  As shown in FIG. 104, on the inner side of the main body portion 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a inclined to one side in the direction of gravity from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 104 (a) left-right direction) of the main body portion 953a to the outer side. A concave portion 954b that is recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c that protrudes from the connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the concave portion 954b, and a surface on both sides in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. And a standing wall 954d that is erected in a row.

  The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of the game ball that rolls the game ball flowing between the pair of inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing in between the facing of the inlet 953j can be rolled to the inlet 953j.

  The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (downward in FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The concave portion 954b has a concave front end surface that is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a to receive the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, another time until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. It is possible to suppress over winnings by suppressing the game balls from entering.

  The recess 954b extends linearly in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 104 (b)) substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, it is possible to easily receive the game ball rolling the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (the left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) in the recess 954b, and shorten the received game ball to the passage member 955. You can guide (inflow) in time. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  Further, in the recess 954b, the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104B) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thus, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be promptly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In addition, the recess 954b has a width dimension in the longitudinal direction of the rolling contact surface 953a2 that is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Accordingly, when a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received by the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). Formed. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled to the front of the inflow port 953j by using the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and quickly rolls toward the passage member 955. Can be made. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced apart from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is changed to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. Two guide surfaces 954d1 are provided.

  The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is inclined from the opening 953a1 side to the inflow port 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and the longitudinal end portion of the rolling surface 953a2. It arrange | positions between the channel | path members 955. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  The projecting portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a and project toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 104 (b) left-right direction) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). . That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased while the rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated before (immediately before) the concave portion 954b, and the game ball passes through the concave portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a. It can suppress rolling to 2 inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  The projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side. Are connected to the side surface of the concave portion 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 opens toward the rolling direction of the game ball on the inclined surface 954a of the game ball (the outer side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2) 953a1. Inclined to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball which rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955).

  That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is increased, and the rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is decelerated immediately before the recess 954b. Thus, the game ball can be prevented from rolling from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  In addition, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both end portions in the short direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a, so that when the plate member 951 is opened, The end of the plate member 951 can be positioned on one end in the gravitational direction (on the gravitational direction) side of the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body 951a.

  Further, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased while the rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated before (immediately before) the concave portion 954b, and the game ball passes through the concave portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a. It can suppress rolling to 2 inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. Accordingly, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. Can do.

  That is, among the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is for a game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1. Therefore, it can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high rolling speed (fast) can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the standing wall 954d, and can be surely decelerated. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly introduced into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while preventing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  In addition, the protruding portion 954c is such that a side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 at the second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface facing the protruding portion 954c. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104B) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set to be smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction. Thereby, the game ball over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the standing wall 954d to be surely decelerated, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  Further, in the standing wall 954d, a separation distance L32 (see FIG. 104A) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the standing wall 954d and reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  A projecting portion 954c is positioned on the extended line in the inclination direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d, and the game ball guided toward the concave portion 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be flowed into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  In the protruding portion 954c, a distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the recessed surface of the recessed portion 954b to the protruding tip is set larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, the projecting portion 954c is formed continuously with the side surface of the recess 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d rolls. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the board member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over winning.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along the line CVIa-CVIa in FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is the line CVIb-CVIb in FIG. 106 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a specific prize opening unit 950 and a drive unit 960 in FIG.

  105 (a) and 105 (b), the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951 and the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83 (a)) are connected. A part of the wiring HS2 is illustrated. In FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83A) of the prize opening unit 930 is a position where the specific prize opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap in a front view. Formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the opposite side (back side) of the game area of the second winning opening 140 (the pair of wing members 945).

  Here, conventionally, a second winning port 140, a pair of wing members 945 for opening or closing the second winning port 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning port 65a. In addition, a gaming machine is known that includes a plate member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a and a second drive unit that drives the plate member 951. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to effectively use the space.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 is disposed on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see FIG. 97). In other words, the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are gathered on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), thereby arranging other members and devices. Space can be secured on the back of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be used effectively.

  Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed in the vicinity of the central opening formed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) (where the center frame 86 is disposed) is distant from the central opening. The movable body of the operation unit that is made visible to the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) by being disposed on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific prize opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize it by retracting it to the back side of 60 (the side opposite to the game area).

  That is, the movable body of the operation unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (retraction), and is difficult to be seen by the player, and at the center opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 during movement (extension). ), The operating means (driving unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed in the vicinity of the central opening is placed at a specific prize opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the unit 950 in a position overlapping the horizontal direction, the movable body can be easily disposed at a position away from the central opening during retraction. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operation unit during normal (withdrawal). As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in the overhanging state, it is easy to give interest to the player.

  In addition, the projection area of the plate member 951 is set larger than the projection area of the pair of wing members 945 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 including two displacement members (the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members 945), the respective driving means (drive unit 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is disposed, each drive means can be easily disposed on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back surface side of the other displacement members (a pair of wing members 945). A space can be formed.

  Furthermore, the plate member 951 is formed so that the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (FIG. 105 (a) left-right direction). Are arranged side by side. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

  In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific prize opening unit 950) is disposed at a position spaced apart from the pair of wing members 945 from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. A01). The longitudinal direction is disposed orthogonal to the separating direction. Thereby, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be easily secured. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

  As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is disposed through the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is provided on the back base 943. 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (disposed) on the front base 943 simultaneously with the operation of fastening and fixing the rear base 941 to the front base 943. Thereby, when attaching the front unit 940 and the pitching unit 970 to the base board 60 (game board 13), it can suppress that the drive unit 960 is forgotten to attach.

  The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set so that the positions of the end portions on the opposite side (back side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific prize opening unit 950 are set to substantially the same position. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end portion on the opposite side (rear side) of the specific prize opening unit 950. Thereby, wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily integrated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being scattered on the opposite side (rear side) of the gaming area of the game board 13, and it is possible to suppress the wirings HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and objects.

  That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged in such a posture that the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 are in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (extracted) to the opposite sides of the main body 961a and the shaft 957a2 from the shafts 961b and 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957 can be easily combined.

  The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush. Thereby, the shape of the partition member (not shown) which partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed can be simplified.

  That is, the side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed in different sizes, or both sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the gravity direction. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the gravitational direction, both side surfaces in the gravitational direction between the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of the partition member becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the gravity direction, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

  The partition member is a conductor barrier for partitioning the region where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed and other regions and restricting electromagnetic waves from flowing between these regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

  Further, the transmission member 965 is disposed between the passage member 955 of the specific prize opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is disposed at the tip (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and displaces with the rotation of the pair of wing members 945 is disposed, the second prize is obtained as compared with the conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members 945 only by the rotation members. A space can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140 on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, unlike the conventional product, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, it is not necessary to bend the pitching path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 toward the specific prize opening unit 950, so that the second The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair in the specific prize opening unit 950 in front view. Established. In other words, the detection device SE2 is disposed between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. Thus, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from the specific prize opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, and thus such fraud is performed. Can be difficult.

  Here, as described above, when the driving means (driving unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific prize opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole penetrating from the gaming area side to the drive unit 960 by a drill or the like is formed in the ball entry member 953 for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the store clerk to detect the fraud. There was a fear.

  In other words, since the board member 951 is disposed on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the fraudulent clerk is regarded as the ball entry member 953. It is difficult to discover.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, for example, when a drilling process is performed using a tool such as a drill, the detection is performed. Since the detection substrate SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, an illegal act can be found by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 is closed by closing the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to be able to detect an illegal act by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1, since the location where the fraud is added and the portion where the fraud has been applied becomes invisible.

  In addition, since the detection device SE1 is the same product (off-the-shelf product) as the detection devices (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detect other game balls, a degree of freedom is secured in the size of the outer shape. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the detection devices SE1 facing each other. For this reason, when the player drills the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a possibility that the cheering of the player cannot be notified to the store clerk.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. Accordingly, the wiring HS3 can be disposed in a gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates a drill or the like aiming at a gap between the facing of the pair of detection devices SE1, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. Thereby, since it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 recognize a detection failure, the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect fraud by notifying the error.

  That is, the wiring is relatively easily damaged. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to enable drilling, the wiring HS3 is damaged (disconnected) along with the illegal act. ) Can be made easy. Alternatively, it can be recognized that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and the illegal act can be easily suppressed.

  An annular projection 953c is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other so that a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed together. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and a fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (the lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is driven by a screw screwed into the annular protrusion 953c. Since 960 can be concealed, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is easily formed between the pair of detection devices SE1. Since the unshielded region on the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with screws, the illegal action can be made more difficult.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953 and arranged. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be drawn (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the opening side of the ball entry member 953, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud. Alternatively, it is easy to recognize that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily suppress the illegal act.

  Therefore, when the player penetrates a drill or the like aiming at a gap between the opposing detection devices SE1, the wiring HS3 can be easily disconnected by the drill. Thereby, since it is possible to make the pachinko machine 10 recognize a detection failure, the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect fraud by notifying the error.

  Furthermore, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c. This makes it difficult for the force in the shearing direction to act on the connection portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning hole unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning hole unit 950 in the discharging direction, thereby detecting A force in the shearing direction acts on a connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion-type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shear direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharging direction of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1. The direction of the force acting on can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring HS3 from being disconnected at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

  Further, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position that is biased toward the end opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3 of the detection device SE1. Accordingly, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is drawn out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annular protrusion 953c), so that the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screw and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

  Next, the overall configuration of the ball sending unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the pitching unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the pitching unit 970. FIG. 108A is an exploded perspective front view of the pitching unit 970, and FIG. 108B is an exploded perspective rear view of the pitching unit 970.

  As shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the pitching unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 provided on the player side (game area side) and having a space through which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980 And a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

  The distribution unit 980 includes openings (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) connected to the first prize port 64 and the second prize port 140 of the above-described prize port unit 930, and the openings (inlet 982d and side wall 981b). ) Can be received inside through the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 from the game area. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

  The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980. The passage unit 990 includes a plurality of openings (a first insertion hole 991a to a second insertion hole 991d on a surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball sent through the distribution unit 980 from the opening. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 112A is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109A, and FIG. 112B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 disposed on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. The distribution unit 983 arranged in a possible state and the cover member 987 arranged mainly at the position corresponding to the distribution unit 983 on the back side of the back base 985 are formed.

  The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating in the thickness direction of the base portion 985a. 985b to 985g), a concave portion 985h provided in the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the concave portion 985h. Formed in preparation.

  The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape at the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the gravitational direction opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through a front base 981 described later. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw that passes through a passage unit 990 described later. Thereby, the back surface base 985 (sorting unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

  The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position that overlaps a part of the other side in the gravitational direction of openings 985b to 985f described later. The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game balls can be easily flown into the openings 985b to 985f.

  The recess 985h is recessed toward the opposite side of the front base 981 (FIG. 109 (b), the front side of the drawing), and is formed at a substantially central position in the short side direction (FIG. 109 (b), left-right direction) of the base portion 985a. Is done. The concave portion 985h is formed on the inner side with a size capable of accommodating a part of a sorting portion 983 described later, and includes a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

  The opening 985b and the opening 985c are formed at both ends in the short direction of the base portion 985a, respectively, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The opening 985b and the opening 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) goes to the opposite side to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball which flows in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981 side.

  The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the short direction (FIG. 109 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Similarly to the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed so as to incline downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) moves toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball which flows in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981 side.

  The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. The openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 in the space that opens to the front base 981 side, and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space that opens on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. The passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 communicating with the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are mainly provided.

  The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between opposing front and rear bases 981 and 985, which will be described later, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. The Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be caused to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

  The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed to have a size that allows game balls to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be caused to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

  The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 that are recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls are sent (the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing a detection device SE3, which will be described later, on the inner side thereof, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in the rear view. Accordingly, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side (the side opposite to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

  Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set in parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are substantially aligned. Placed in position. Thus, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the game ball can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball which passes 1st channel | path TR1 and 2nd channel | path TR2 is detectable.

  In addition, since the detection device SE3 has the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a formed in parallel to the direction of gravity, it is possible to easily use the weight of the game ball when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the connection portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. The detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed continuously with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it can suppress that the length dimension of the gravity direction of intermediate channel 985e2 and 985f2 becomes large. As a result, the back base 985 can be prevented from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

  The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and are formed to have a size through which a game ball can pass. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990 described later in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can be flowed into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and can be sent to the passage unit 990 through the spaces.

  The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Similarly to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed so as to incline downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) goes to the opposite side to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

  The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between opposing front and rear bases 981 and 985, which will be described later, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. The Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be caused to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

  The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies. The accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, and an inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as an outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in the cylindrical body. The projecting dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be slightly large due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semi-annular bodies are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

  The protruding portion 986e protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a position on the opposite side across the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. The projecting portion 986e includes a fastening hole that is recessed in a circular shape on the shaft. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing a tip of a screw that passes through a cover member 987 described later, and the cover member 987 is fastened to the back surface base 985 by screwing the screw in a state where the cover member 987 is in contact. Can be fixed.

  The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can be generated in the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a by being disposed in the housing portion 986b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988c arrange | positioned at the distribution part 983 mentioned later can be repelled, and the distribution part 983 can be made easy to displace.

  The front base 981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material (blue in this embodiment). The front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 in a front view, and is expanded from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (the side opposite to the rear base 986). It is mainly provided with a protruding portion 982.

  The base plate 981a is formed in a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the thickness direction in the outer peripheral edge portion thereof, and a first guide wall protruding toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

  The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball-feeding unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. .

  The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular ring shape, and a pair of first guide walls 981f are formed in the short direction with a bulging portion 982 described later interposed therebetween. In addition, the first guide wall 981f is formed with the semicircular open portion facing the substantially central side in the short direction of the base plate 981a.

  The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed in two places in the short direction of the base plate 981a. The second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of a bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between two locations.

  The inner edges of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back surface base 985 described above. Accordingly, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

  The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side to be screwed into the fastening hole 986d. Thus, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

  The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side in FIG. 109 (a)) along the edge portion. The through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning port 140 of the above-described winning port unit 930. When the winning port unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, the second winning port 140 is provided. It is formed at a position that overlaps the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the box.

  The side wall portion 981b is formed to have a size such that the standing front end surface is in contact with the second ball feeding portion 942c of the winning port unit 930 in a state where the winning port unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. The side wall 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) positioned on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a. Inclined downward toward the side.

  Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 protruding from the standing tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radial separation of the game balls in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be hardly caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

  The bulge portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof. A game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside. And a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the pitching passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an inflow port 982d formed by notching the upper end portion in the direction of gravity, and is bent and erected toward the back base 985 at a substantially intermediate position when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided with a standing wall 982a and concave portions 982e to 982j that are recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

  The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion in the state where the winning opening unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930. It is formed at the overlapping position.

  In addition, the inflow port 982d includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes to the opposite side of the back surface base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the inner edge shape of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the above-described winning opening unit 930. When the winning opening unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is in contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

  Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inlet 982d on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first pitch from the inner edge of the first recess 942g1. It is set larger than the distance dimension to the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction. Thereby, when the game ball sent to the first pitching portion 942g through the first winning port 64 flows into the inlet 982d, the inflow port 982d (the bulging portion 982) and the first pitching portion 942g It is difficult to get caught in between.

  The standing wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is spaced a predetermined distance from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 in a front view. The standing wall 982a is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the standing direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

  The standing wall 982a is set such that a distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed in a space through which the air can pass.

  The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a distribution unit 983 described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either one. The sorting unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately sent to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it can suppress that the pitch of the game ball which flows into the 1st winning opening 64 becomes monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  On the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in the gravitational direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c projecting in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the back base 985 is formed. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

  As described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back surface base 985, when combining the front base 981 and the back surface base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is used as the bearing portion 985j. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 by inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

  The abutting portion 982a1 is formed on a rotation locus of the distributing portion 983 described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distributing portion 983 is restricted by the abutting action portion 983a of the distributing portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

  The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In addition, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f.

  The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Accordingly, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game ball can be flowed into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

  The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game ball can be flowed into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

  The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

  The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows into the first passage TR1, and the flowed game ball can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

  The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows into the first passage TR1, and the flowed game ball can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

  The concave portion 982g is formed between the concave portion 982h and the concave portion 982j, and the concave direction is set in parallel with the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. A third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be reduced in size. .

  The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the rear base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the received game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

  The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is inclined and extended toward the back surface base 985 toward the one side in the gravitational direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Accordingly, the game ball flowing down by bringing the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f and easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

  The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h, the recess 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and the standing front end surface is lowered toward the rear base 985 side (FIG. 109 (b) front side of the paper surface). Be inclined. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is easy to flow into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

  The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. Thus, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, thereby opening the game ball 985e. And can flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and the durability can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball-feeding unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning hole unit 930) disposed on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 are difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are played by the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1. There was a problem that it was difficult for the person to see.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, the standing dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the game balls sent to the opening 985e and the opening 985f (game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) easily visible even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned on the back base 985 side as it goes in the flow direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring the rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

  The distribution portion 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape in front view. Further, the distributing portion 983 penetrates through a T-shaped action portion 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the action portion 983a, and a connecting portion of the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. Through-hole 983c, a contact portion 983d bulging in a circular shape around the axis of the through-hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e formed by connecting to the back base 985 side of the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. And is mainly provided.

  The through hole 983c is a hole into which the shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 is opposed, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated in a state in which the sorting portion 983 can be rotated by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the sorting portion 983. 985 is disposed between the opposing surfaces.

  The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by being rotated to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b The distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the pitching of the game ball is restricted to one of the first path TR1 and the second path TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b is configured such that the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the game ball is sent to the other of the second passage TR2 from the state where the delivery of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1. Can be switched to a restricted state.

  The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in a front view. In addition, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state where a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the sorting portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

  The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when the through hole 983c is viewed in the axial direction. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 985h of the back surface base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be disposed inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is disposed between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball from being inhibited by the game ball sent from the inflow port 982d to the inside of the sorting unit 980 being caught inside the recess 985h.

  Further, the wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 which is provided on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the radially outer end toward the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the back base 985 side.

  The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is disposed in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, the magnetic field 988c is applied with magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back base 985, and the distributing unit 983 rotates around the through hole 983c to change the extending direction of the operating part 983a to one side or the other side. It can be in a tilted state.

  Further, the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a state of being repelled, and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, so that the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is housed in the housing portion 983e1. Can be prevented from exiting. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

  Note that the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic adhesion force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and stagnating inside the distribution unit 980.

  The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985 h of the back base 985. In addition, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape when viewed from the front side by side in the direction of gravity.

  The first recessed portion 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back surface base 985 described above, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b is accommodated by accommodating the tip of the accommodation portion 986b in the first recess 987a in a state where the magnetic body 988b is accommodated in the accommodation portion 986b as described above. It is possible to suppress the escape from the portion 986b.

  The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back surface base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. The second recess 987b is formed such that the inner shape of the recessed portion is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can be positioned and disposed by accommodating the second recess 987b in the projecting portion 986e of the back surface base 985, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the projecting portion 986e. Can be concluded.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the sorting unit 983 when a game ball flows into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following description, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from a state in which the game ball is sent to one side of the first path TR1 to a state in which the game ball is sent to the other side of the second path TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description in the case of restricting the sending of game balls to one of the first passages TR1 from the state of restricting the delivery of game balls to the other of the second passages TR2 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is sent to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), as described above, the game is distributed to the distribution 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined to the second passage TR2 side. In addition, the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113A).

  When a game ball is sent to the sorting unit 983 in this state, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. The load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. It is said. Note that the amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state on the first passage TR1 side.

  Accordingly, the distributing unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. In addition, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state where the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, each time the game ball is sent, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b to send the game ball one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

  Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that sends a game ball that passes through, a third passage member 993 that is disposed on the second passage member 992 and sends a game ball that passes through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. A detection device SE4 disposed between three passage members 993 is mainly provided.

  The first passage member 991 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 includes a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) on the distribution unit 980 side, and one side in the gravitational direction (lower in the gravitational direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. A second insertion hole 991b that is formed to penetrate the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d that are formed to be adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and an outer periphery in front view And a plurality of through-holes 991f formed in a circular shape.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down through the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 1st penetration hole 991a can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  Further, an annular ring protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Accordingly, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the sorting unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 2nd penetration hole 991b can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

  Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes a recessed portion 991c1 that is recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. Accordingly, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 is prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

  Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside and to reduce the size of the ball sending unit 970 as a whole.

  The third insertion hole 991c includes a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2, and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (the left direction in FIG. 114 (a)).

  The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down through the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

  Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes a recessed portion 991d1 that is recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. Accordingly, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 is prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

  Furthermore, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is horizontal. The second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b is inclined downward in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2, and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (right direction in FIG. 114 (a)).

  The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in a front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole. A sixth insertion hole 992c that penetrates to one side in the gravity direction of 922 (lower side in the gravity direction) and a standing wall 992a that stands on the inner periphery of the fifth insertion hole 922 are mainly formed.

  The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

  The standing wall 992a is erected from the entire edge portion of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. The standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 5th penetration hole 922 can be rolled to the 3rd channel | path member 993 side (FIG. 114 (b) right side).

  On the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a, an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end portion on the first passage member 991 side are formed. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. In the engaging portion 992d, the wiring of the detecting device SE4 and the detecting device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted between the engaging portion 992d and the standing wall 992a. Thereby, since wiring of detection device SE3 and detection device SE4 can be locked, it can control that detection device SE3 and detection device SE4 slip out from distribution unit 980 and passage unit 990.

  The protruding wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in front view on both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating through the semicircular shaft. The projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Accordingly, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

  The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. The Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

  In addition, a guide wall 992c1 that is erected toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 standing on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction, and gravity. And a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

  The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed on the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimension is set to be substantially the same as the dimension at the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

  The detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

  The second passage member 992 includes an annular protrusion 992f that protrudes toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular protrusion 992f is provided with a circular hole fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through the third passage member 993, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down through the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 1st penetration hole 991a can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  Further, an annular ring protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Accordingly, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the sorting unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 2nd penetration hole 991b can be rolled to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side.

  The third passage member 993 is formed in a plate-like shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed so as to penetrate at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from an edge portion of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction Mainly comprising a standing wall 993e standing on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

  The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

  The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge in the three directions excluding the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the seventh insertion hole 993a toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992 side). Is done. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 7th insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the opposite side to the 2nd channel | path member 992 side (FIG. 114 (b) right side).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 114 (b)), the third passage member 993 can be disposed closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the sorting unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the outer shape in the gravity direction of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 can be reduced in size.

  In the state in which the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the standing wall 993e has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the first wall portion 992c2 facing the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

  In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravity direction is formed on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game balls are sent. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

  That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating, and therefore, the inner position of the detection hole SE1a is increased due to a slight displacement of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In this embodiment, the first wall 992c2 for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravitational direction is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is sent. Since it is formed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface. As a result, it is possible to easily insert the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c into the detection hole SE1a.

  The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. In the state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 facing the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the long side in the direction orthogonal to the axis is set substantially the same. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

  The concave portion 993c is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 992f. It is formed in a larger inner edge shape. The concave portion 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed on the bottom surface of the concave portion so as to be coaxially formed with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f. Accordingly, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted into the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to thereby form the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

  According to the pitching unit 970 configured as described above, the pitching unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140, and the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. Is provided on the back side (opposite to the game area) of the front unit 940, so that a game that flows down the game area by replacing the pitching unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. Another game form can be made without affecting the flow of the ball.

  With reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, another unit (exchange unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-section of the exchange unit 1980 along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the distribution unit 980 mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the game area side and a back base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the game area side. Formed in preparation.

  The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a to the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

  In addition, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (yellow in this embodiment). This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is disposed on the game board 13.

  That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specification of the distribution unit 980 and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specification of the replacement unit 1980 are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, the game area (the front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, so it is difficult for the player to determine which specification, but the color arrangement of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 is different. By making it, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10).

  The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (exchange unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 in accordance with the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted therein. The bulging portion 1982 is formed to have a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the gravity direction.

  The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside and flow down. . Further, the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a position in the same gravity direction as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. Thereby, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be sent to the opening 985d in the order of flow into the inflow port 982d.

  The rear base 1985 has an outer shape in front view substantially the same as the outer shape of the rear base 985 of the sorting unit 980, and communicates with the opening 985d communicating with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982 and the internal space of the through hole 981c. And an opening 985g.

  According to the replacement unit 1980 configured as described above, since the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980 as described above, the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980. Replacement (specification change) can be easily performed.

  Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball unit is disposed The machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting the game board (combined use) by replacing the entering unit with another entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages). it can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the incoming ball unit is disposed on the front surface of the game board, for example, a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages needs to be secured in front of the game board in advance. For this reason, when a ball entering unit with a small number of passages is used, there is a problem in that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (entrance ball unit) has the inflow port 982d and the first and second passages TR1 and TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d. A prize opening unit 930 arranged on the front side, and arranged on the back side of the prize opening unit 930 through a through hole 60a of the base plate 60 and connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the prize opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. There is no need. Therefore, when the specification of the game board 13 is changed while the game board 13 (the base plate 60 and the front unit 940) is diverted (combined) by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the exchange unit 1980, the front face of the game board 13 is used. Can be used effectively.

  Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light transmissive material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the winning a prize opening unit. At the same time, since it is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light transmissive material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate, Then, a seal is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since the base plate 60 can be painted, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light transmissive material) resin material, the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 flows through the front unit 940 and the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light transmissive material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed from a colored translucent (light transmissive material) resin material. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the unit 940. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down by changing the position in the front-rear direction, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the game ball path of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a pitching path TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 branched from the pitching path TR0. The distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 that detects a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a gaming machine having a different specification by changing from the sorting unit 980 having a large number of game ball passage paths to the replacement unit 1980 having a small number of passing paths, it is possible to suppress an operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

  That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980. In the case of changing from two distribution units 980 to one replacement unit 1980 with one downflow passage, the number of downflow passages of the distribution unit 980 is sufficient if one detection sensor is provided in the passage unit 990. There is a possibility that the detectors SE3 are disposed by the amount. On the other hand, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the ball sending passage TR0, when the distribution unit 980 is changed to the replacement unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from mistaken the number of the arrangements.

  On the other hand, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls to the second winning opening 140 is disposed in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom of the passage arrangement can be increased accordingly.

  Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for sending a game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140 to the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the replacement unit 1980 is disposed in the front unit 940 (winning slot unit 930), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same. Therefore, the replacement unit 1980 is positioned by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a. Even so, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

  Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of displacement (step) in the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as with the distribution unit 980. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of displacement (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 will be described. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. A01.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the connection between the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball sending unit 970 is in a state of abutting in the front-rear direction (left and right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portions formed in the ball feeding unit 970 are It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

  More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d are provided with a second protrusion 982d1 formed in the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, the second ball-throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b are provided with a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the second ball-throwing portion 942c.

  Further, the second ball feeding portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are disposed in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

  Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member communicated with the first passage of the first member. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine having two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of a game board is known. The game ball flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage and then flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, Pass through two passages. Thereby, the passage route of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be provided with interest.

  In this case, if there is a positional shift (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member relative to the first member is ensured. It is requested to do. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member relative to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning those members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed in the process of forming the first member, the gaming board is inverted to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the gaming board. A separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is necessary, which is not practical.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed in the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 is opposed to the protruding portion 962g of the drive unit 960. A wall 942d is inserted. When the ball feeding unit 970 is disposed on the front unit 940, the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 970 is inserted between the arms 962e from which the protruding portions 962g are protruded.

  That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protruding portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball feeding unit 970. With. Accordingly, the front unit 940 and the ball sending unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

  The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located on the outer side in the facing direction of the pair of second ball feeding portions 942c of the front unit 940. As a result, the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b has the protruding portion 962g engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and the arm portion 962e engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball feeding unit 970. Positioning of the pitching unit 970 with respect to 940 can be performed effectively. That is, the positioning of the ball feeding unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) in the connection portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. Since the guide part 962b (arm part 962e) can be directly positioned (the connecting part of the second ball feeding part 942c and the side wall part 981b), compared with the case where the other part is positioned by the guide part 962b, Generation | occurrence | production of position shift (step) can be suppressed effectively.

  The drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening for disposing the drive unit 960. That is, since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, the processing man-hour is reduced accordingly. The product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) on the front unit 940 including the second ball-throwing portion 942c. When each of the ball feeding units 970 is attached, it is not necessary to attach the drive unit 960 separately. By attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the attachment workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the state where the drive unit 960 is disposed in the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. The Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the attachment workability can be improved accordingly.

  Further, in a state where the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engageable with the ball feeding unit 970 from the opposite side to the front unit 940. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball feeding unit 970 simultaneously with the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other. When the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e, the wall portion 962f, and the front unit 940 are connected to each other. The displacement member 966 described above is disposed between the rear surface base 941 and the opposite surface. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is disposed at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is inserted in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 can be blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and dust and foreign matter can be prevented from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to stably prevent the pair of wing members from being opened or closed by suppressing the sliding of the projecting portion 966a due to dust or foreign matter entering the sliding groove 966a2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, the connection state will be described using the connection between the second ball-throwing portion 942 c and the side wall portion 981 b as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXXb of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of game board 13 in a -CXXb line. 121 (a) and 121 (b) illustrate a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). The

  As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set such that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

  Here, a game provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through an upstream end connected to the downstream end of the first passage member. The machine is known. However, in the structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected in this way, a positional shift between the two is unavoidable, so the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem in that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  Further, the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60 as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning slot unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 may be separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (FIG. 120 (a) left-right direction). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second ball-throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, and the smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface side can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the space K1 formed between the rolling part 943a of the game ball of the second throwing part 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the game ball of the side wall part 981b, and the second throwing part A space K2 formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different in the rolling direction of the game ball (FIG. 121 (a) left-right direction). . Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball rolled from the 2nd ball-throwing part 942c to the side wall part 981b enters into both the clearance gap K1 and the clearance gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second ball-throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second ball sending portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

  Next, the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment is formed on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 8966. A concave portion 8966a6 is provided that is recessed toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape in the rear view. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in a plate shape that is a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed penetratingly formed at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966 c is formed so that the inner edge shape in front view is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the displacement member 8966 is disposed inside the front unit 940 in a state where it is disposed. Two winning openings 140 are arranged.

  Further, the displacement member 8966 includes a projecting portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 122 upper side) to the short side direction (left and right direction in FIG. 122), and the other end in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) And a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the back side (the front side in FIG. 122).

  The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 that is formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and an abutting portion 966a1 that is located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 8966 and extends in the longitudinal direction. Prepare.

  The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted. The sliding groove 8966a2 extends in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and the concave portion 8966a6 extends to the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

  The recess 8966a6 is set such that the width dimension in the lateral direction is larger than the maximum dimension between the opposed outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b. In addition, the side surface on the moving side of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (the left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

  Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, at least a part of the projection 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by abutting.

  On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is recessed into the recess 8966a6. Can be extracted from the inside. Accordingly, the protrusion 945b can be displaced by bringing the protrusion 945b into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2.

  That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, the drive can be restricted from being transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6. And the protrusion 945b can be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is in a closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity), the protrusion 945b can be received as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6 using the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, an insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has been described in the case where the distal end is disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is used. The tip of the projection protrudes from the coupling hole 966b1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  123A and 123B are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 123A and FIG. 123B correspond to FIG. FIG. 123 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945. In FIG. 123 (b), the closed wing member 945 is illegally operated (forced release) by the player and is released from the closed state. The engagement state in the middle of displacement is shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 according to the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to the distal end portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and the distal end portion 9965a. The rotating portion 965b is continuous and is extended to the connecting member 964 side.

  As in the seventh embodiment, the distal end portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotary shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 9965a protrudes from the coupling side of the insertion portion 9965e inserted into the coupling hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 and the rotating shaft 965c to the one end in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). And an installation portion 965f.

  The insertion portion 9965e is formed such that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the insertion portion 9965e is inserted and disposed inside the connection hole 966b1, and the end of the tip is connected to the connection hole. It protrudes from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e bulges from the coupling hole 966b1 to the engagement portion 9965e3 protruding to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the coupling hole 966b1. And a bulging portion 965e1.

  The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is formed at a position separating a slight gap from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123B, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other and transmitted. The displacement of the member 9965 can be restricted.

  More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the one-side contacted portion 966b2 of the coupling hole 966b1 contacts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to rotational displacement and is displaced toward the rotational shaft 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. Thereby, since the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is similarly regulated.

  On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is rotated before the displacement member 966, whereby the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are moved. It can suppress contacting. Accordingly, the displacement member 966 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965.

  As described above, the protrusion 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 is connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when driving is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, and the rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  That is, the transmission member 9965 according to the ninth embodiment includes the insertion portion 9965e and the engagement portion 9965e3 projecting from the distal end of the insertion portion 9965e, and displaces the displacement member 966 with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only disposed at the inner end of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the insertion of the transmission member 10965 is performed. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connection hole 10966b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is made small.

  124 (a) and 124 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). 124 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) shows the opened state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to the distal end portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and the distal end portion 10965a. It is formed from a rotating portion that is continuous and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

  As in the seventh embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotary shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 10965a protrudes from the connection side between the rotation shaft 965c and the insertion portion 10965e to be inserted into a connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, which will be described later, at one end of the distal end portion 10965a. And a standing portion 965f.

  The insertion portion 10965e is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted into the connection hole 10966b. The insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion bulging from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connection hole 966b1. 964d1.

  The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape that curves around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recess 10966d of a displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes a contact surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

  The displacement member 10966 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed at a substantially central position when viewed from the front so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 124 (a)). The second opening 966c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second ball feeding portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941, and the second ball feeding portion 942c is inserted inside. It is arranged with. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the opposite side to the game area via the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

  Further, the displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes in the short direction from one end in the longitudinal direction, a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the back side, and a surface opposite to the bulging portion 966b. And a recessed portion 10966d that is recessed.

  The concave portion 10966d is formed to be continuous with the other contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes a contacted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contacted surface 10966d1 is formed to be curved around the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap from the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged opposite to each other. Further, the abutted surface 10966d1 includes an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connection hole 966b1.

  The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed on the radially inner side with respect to the abutted surface 10966d1 having the rotation shaft 965c as the center.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the distance between the facing portions 966b3 and 966b2 on the other side of the connecting hole 966b1 is equal to the distance between the facing portions 966b2 when the wing member 945 is closed. It is set to be larger than the width dimension L39 (see FIG. 124A) of 10965e in the gravity direction. Thus, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the back side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contacted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, and the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

  According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, when the solenoid 610 is driven, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Is done. Thereby, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contacted surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c. , The contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state with a slight gap from the contacted surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contacted surface 10966d1 are displaced without interference.

  As described above, since the distance dimension between the other side abutted part 966b3 of the coupling hole 966b1 and the one side abutted part 966b2 is formed larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member By rotating 10965, the insertion portion 10965e disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out of the recess 10966d. Accordingly, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid. Accordingly, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

  Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contacted surface 10966d1. Thus, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced to the inside of the recess 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

  On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Accordingly, the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced along with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, and the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back side by the rotational displacement. Accordingly, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contacted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes the insertion portion 10965e and the engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contacted portion One side in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 10965e is brought into contact with 966b2 and the engagement portion 10965e3 is brought into engagement with the displacement member 10966, and the other side in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 10965e (the bulging portion) is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3. When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity until the position 965e1) contacts, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without rotating. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly retained from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 to the outside, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 is released from the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

  Next, the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. However, the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged from the second winning opening 140. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. FIG. 126 (a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) illustrates the open state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140. In the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling part 943a disposed between the second ball feeding part 942c is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second ball feeding part 942c.

  The pair of second guide walls 11194b is formed with a gear tooth flank first tooth surface 11942b1 on opposite side surfaces thereof. In addition, the pair of second guide walls 11194b is set such that the separation distance between the facing walls is larger than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) of the displacement member 11966 described later. Is disposed.

  The first gear surface 11942b1 meshes with a first gear GY1 that is pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966 described later. As a result, the first gear GY1 meshing with the first tooth surface 11192b1 can be rotated by the displacement member 11966 being slid.

  The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed in a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 11967, and a shaft on the first member 11967. The first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968 is formed.

  The first member 11967 is formed with a second opening 966c penetrating in the thickness direction at a substantially central position in front view. The first member 11967 includes a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and the second opening 966c on the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding projection 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides of the sandwiched short direction.

  The support portion 11966d protrudes toward the first member 11967 and the tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Accordingly, the first gear GY1 can be supported by the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

  The sliding projection 11966e is provided on the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Accordingly, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

  The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially portal shape when viewed from the front, and has second tooth surfaces 11968a1 of gear tooth surfaces on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction), Horizontal direction of the sliding groove 11968b formed in the plate thickness direction in the form of a long hole along the extending direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (FIG. 126 (a) vertical direction) and the inner edge formed in the gate shape And an edge portion 11968c that is inclined in the thickness direction on the end face.

  The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are engaged with the first gear GY1, respectively. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

  As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid relative to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding projection 11966e.

  Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

  The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion of the blade portion 11968c is more than the inner surface of the second ball feeding portion 942c on the other end side in the gravitational direction when the wing member 945 is closed. It is arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction. Thereby, the front-end | tip of the blade part 11968c can be arrange | positioned in the gravity direction other end side rather than the rolling surface of the game ball which flows in from the 2nd prize winning opening 140. FIG.

  In addition, the projecting distance of the second ball-throwing portion 942c is set to a length that makes contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling part 943a disposed between the second ball sending part 942c and the second ball sending part 942c is set to be approximately the same position as the tip position of the second ball feeding part 942c. Accordingly, the foreign matter inserted into the second winning port 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface and the blade portion and 11968c flowing from the second winning port 140.

  According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is closed, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. And the second ball-throwing portion 942c can be disposed below the tip of the gravitational direction, so that the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is cut off by an unauthorized operation in a state where the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement of the game ball entering from the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 11966.

  On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, whereby the second member 11968 is displaced. The displacement amount of the first member 11967 is set larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount double the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 The rolling part 943a, which is the rolling surface, can be separated by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in an open state, it is possible to allow the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 to flow down.

  That is, the second member 11968 crosses the path of the game ball that flows down from the second winning port 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed, and the edge of the path Since the blade portion that comes into frictional contact with the end portion (the end portions of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c) is provided, the illegal thing that is illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 is cut. Can do.

  For example, the detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) detects the passage of the game ball by adhering the tip of the thread to the game ball, causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140 and passing the rolling part 943a. In the state where the game ball has reached (1), the other end of the thread is operated (drawn and pulled), and the game ball is reciprocated to cause the detection device SE4 to detect a plurality of times. According to the eleventh embodiment, in response to such an illegal act, even if the above-described game ball is inserted with the wing member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. When 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and the blade portion 11968c crosses the passages of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is taken as the blade portion 11968c. When the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edge portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the second ball feeding portion 942c are pressed against the edge portion of the rolling portion 943a or the second ball feeding portion 942c. A thread | yarn can be cut | disconnected between the edge part of the rolling part 943a or the 2nd ball-throwing part 942c. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, a displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. However, the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment is separated from the second winning opening 140. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. FIG. In FIG. 128 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 128 (b), the open state of the wing member 945 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on the outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140. In the twelfth embodiment, the protruding distance of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a is set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where it abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. The

  In addition, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 are provided on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted through shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

  The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting in the opposing direction on one end side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the opposite side surface. The distance dimension between the facing portions of the pair of contact portions 12942b2 is set slightly larger than the width dimension in the short direction of the first member 12967 described later. Accordingly, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

  The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate as viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 12967, and a pivotal support on the rear base 941. The first gear GY1 meshed with the first member 12967 and the second gear GY2 pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968 are mainly provided.

  The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back surface base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface thereof includes the first member 12967 and the second gear. It meshes with GY2.

  The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two-stage gears each having a different size, and includes a small-diameter small-diameter gear GY2a and a large-diameter large-diameter gear GY2b. Further, as described above, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back surface base 941, and the tooth surface of the small-diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1, and the teeth of the large-diameter gear GY2b. The surface meshes with the second member 12968.

  The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 12966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The first member 12967 includes a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second opening 12966c, and the second opening. Sliding projections 12966e are provided so as to project annularly on both sides in the short direction across 12966c, and third tooth surfaces 12966f of gear tooth surfaces are formed on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

  The second opening 12966c is set such that the shape of the inner edge in front view is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c includes a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

  The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are closed, and the pair of wing members 945 is provided. In the opened state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

  The sliding protrusion 12966e protrudes on the second member 12968 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Accordingly, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

  The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. Accordingly, the first gear GY1 can be rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is engaged with the small-diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, and thus the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

  The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body in a front view, and is disposed in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128 (a)). Further, the second member 12968 has a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outer side in the opposing direction of the pair of extending portions, and the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a (the vertical direction in FIG. 128 (a)). And is formed with a sliding groove 12968b that is formed in the shape of an elongated hole in the plate thickness direction, and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) of the connecting portion that connects the pair of extending portions. Is done.

  As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the gravitational direction by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

  The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a mesh with the large-diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2. Accordingly, the second member 12968 is slid and displaced by the rotation of the second gear GY2. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated when the first member 12967 is slid and displaced by the transmission member 965. Accordingly, the second member 12968 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the first member 12967.

  Note that the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to have opposite slide displacement directions, and the displacement amount of the second member 12968 is set to be larger by the small diameter second gear GY2.

  The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion of the blade portion 6683 is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second ball-throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) On the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in the gravitational direction) than the inner surface of. That is, the second member 12968 is disposed at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 in a front view in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

  Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c and rub the edges of each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning port 140. it can.

  For example, the tip of a thread is bonded to the game ball, and the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140 and passes through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling unit 943a and the second ball feeding unit 942c, and the detection device SE4. In the state in which the game ball has reached the detection position, there is an illegal act of causing the detection device SE4 to detect a plurality of times by operating (feeding out and pulling) the other end of the thread and reciprocating the game ball. In response to such a fraudulent act, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the pair of wing members 945 opened, the pair of wing members 945 is displaced from the opened position to the closed position. When the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is placed between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. Can be sandwiched and cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second member 12968 is located on the other side in the gravitational direction with respect to the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball in which the blade portion 6683 enters the second winning port 140. Be placed. As described above, in a state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is disposed outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can pass between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can block the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140, so that the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is the eleventh. The number can be smaller than that of the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the gaming ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is performed through the three members of the coupling member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 is used. The transmission of the drive from the blade member 945 to the blade member 945 is performed with one member. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 930 along the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line in FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line only for the sake of easy understanding. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 are closed, and the shaft portion 961b projects from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are in a state of being opened.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment is disposed on the back side (the right side in FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific prize opening unit 950, and the shaft of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is gravity-coupled. It arrange | positions in the state which faced the direction (FIG. 129 (b) up-down direction). In addition, a transmission member 13965 is coupled to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

  The transmission member 13965 is erected from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and from the end of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. And an engaging portion 13965j.

  The annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at the end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Accordingly, the transmission member 13965 can be slid and displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction.

  The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping with the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (up and down direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the engaging portion 13965j is set to have a standing dimension that exceeds the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 and overlaps the protrusion 945b in a front view.

  Further, a support portion 13965j1 that is substantially C-shaped in a side view protrudes from the standing tip of the engaging portion 13965j. The support portion 13965j1 is set such that the facing distance inside the opening is larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (the left-right direction in FIG. 129 (a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be disposed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

  Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the gravitational direction, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the gravitational direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. When the protrusion 945b is displaced, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

  According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). In other words, the space for arranging the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 is concentrated on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space for arranging other members and devices becomes the pair of wing members 945 (second winning prize). It can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

  Next, the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the coupling hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in front view has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the displacement A case where the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  130 (a) and 131 (a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXb-CXXXb line in FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) shows the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line in FIG. 131 (a). FIG.

  In FIGS. 130 (a) and 131 (a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is shown by chain lines. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut. The opened state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case of being done is illustrated. Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the specific winning port 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning port 140 than in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a plate-like shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. It penetrates and forms in the plate | board thickness direction (FIG.130 (b) left-right direction).

  The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) from the one end side (FIG. 130 (a) upper side) to the short side direction (FIG. And a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (the lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the rear side (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge on the back side (the back base 941 side), and a horizontally-long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in an inner portion in the back view. The connection hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the distal end (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the inner edge shape is set larger than the outer shape of the distal end of the transmission member 965.

  The connection hole 14966b1 is configured such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is set to be substantially square, and the one-side abutted portion 966b2 on the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a))) And the other-side abutted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

  The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed such that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other-side contacted portion 966b3 to the one-side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 966b3.

  Further, the connection hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other-side contacted portion 966b3 to the one-side contacted portion 14966b2). The distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball (L40-L41)> (L42-game ball Diameter). Thereby, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the rolling path of the game ball flowing from the second winning port 140 can be blocked at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

  Next, a case where the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connection hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravitational direction and the pair of wing members 945 are closed, Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side contact is made. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

  As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set such that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is greater than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). -The diameter of the game ball), the free movement of the displacement member 14966 allows the rolling path of the game ball flowing from the second winning port 140 to be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

  That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, the displacement member 14966 is in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are not in communication with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)). Is disposed in the path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140, for example, even if the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 14966.

  Next, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is disposed and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described. However, in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is positioned on the side wall. Positioned and positioned inside the portion 981b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. FIG. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb line of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

  First, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed in a box shape, and is arranged to face each other, a first accommodating portion 15962 and a second accommodating portion 963, a first accommodating portion 15962, A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the second storage portions 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a support member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first storage portion 15962 and the second storage portion 963. And a transmission member 965 connected to the main body.

  The first housing portion 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers a cover portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. 132 (a)), and the back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover portion 962a. And a guide portion 15962b projecting to the reference).

  The drive unit 15960 is formed in a space between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 that are formed in a box shape and disposed to face each other. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 that is pivotally supported by the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963 and connected to the connection member 964 are mainly formed. Is done.

  The first housing portion 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers a cover 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in FIG. 93 (a)), and the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover 962a. And a guide portion 15962b projecting to the reference).

  The guide portion 15962b is connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L shape in a side view, the wall portion 962f formed in a front portal structure, and the wall portion A protruding portion 962g that protrudes from 962f on the opposite side to the covering portion 962a (the back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)) and a pair of arm portions 15962e are located on the other side in the gravity direction and protrude from the wall portion 962f. The second arm portion 15962j and the third arm portion 15962h projecting on the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j across the wall portion 962f are mainly formed.

  The arm portion 15962e protrudes from the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a to the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) and bends the protruding tip side to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the projecting position in the gravity direction of the arm portion 15962e is set below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

  The second arm portion 15962j is formed to be connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of facing portions 962e is set smaller than the width dimension between the facing portions of the pair of arm portions 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second arm portion 15962j is set such that the distance dimension in the gravitational direction is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing side portions of the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 980 in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the sorting unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall 981b.

  The pair of second arm portions 15962j is set such that the distance dimension on the outer side in the opposing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side walls 981b in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, when the distribution unit 980 (ball feeding unit 970) is disposed in the winning a prize opening unit 930, the positioning can be performed by disposing the second arm portion 15962j inside the side wall portion 981b.

  The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between facing the arm portions 15962e. The third arm portion 15962h is provided with a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the rear base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

  In the protruding portion 15962h1, the protruding distance from the end portion of the second arm portion 15962j to the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is disposed inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

  Accordingly, the upstream end portion of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed in a different position in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the timing and the side surface when the game ball passes the step on the bottom side. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface, and the influence of the game ball is dispersed, so that the game ball can flow (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can combine the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140 It becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can easily allow a dimensional effect or a mounting intersection.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second pitching portion 16942c of the winning unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is disposed inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second ball feeding portion 942c has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the second ball feeding portion 16942c. The protrusion 16942c2 is disposed inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment has a standing front end surface with a winning hole unit in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. It is formed in a size that comes into contact with the tip of the second ball sending portion 16942c of 930.

  Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed portion 16981b2 that is recessed in the standing base end side on the standing distal end surface. The recessed portion 16981b2 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radial separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and the recessed shape in side view is a shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball feeding portion 16942c described later in side view. Are set to be substantially the same.

  Accordingly, when a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be hardly caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where a game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

  In addition, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the erected base end side is inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which rolls the rolling surface of the through-hole 981c bounces upward in the switching part of the rolling path | route of the game ball.

  That is, in the sixteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball that has collided with the recessed distal surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 Can be pressed to the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being bounced up and bouncing at the recessed front end surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to protrude from the protruding front end surface of the second ball feeding portion 16942c, and the outer shape in side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. Thus, when a game ball that rolls on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the gaming ball is recessed in the dent portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. Can be prevented from being pinched inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to smoothly pass (flow down) the game ball from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed with different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is on the bottom side. The timing of passing through the step and the timing of passing through the side step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the sixteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side. The bottom surface downstream end of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second ball-throwing portion 942c is formed at a position different from the bottom surface upstream end of the rolling portion 943a on the downstream side in the game ball passing direction, the side surface upstream of the side wall portion 16981b. Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball-throwing portion 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

  On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may be broken. According to the sixteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, the bottom surface upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b can be maintained in different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the side surface side The timing of passing through the step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the effect of the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time and to disperse the influence of the game ball, so that the game ball can flow (pass) smoothly. be able to.

  In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning prize opening unit 930 side and the concave notch 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the concave notch 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, thereby the rolling part 943a. The position shift of the sorting unit 980 to the upper side in the gravity direction can be restricted. That is, at the level difference where the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a, it is easy for the game ball to jump up. Compared to the opposite step, it is easy to inhibit the smooth flow (passing) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for smooth flow of the game ball that the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b can be prevented from being displaced in the gravity direction above the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second pitching portion 17942c of the winning unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall 981b and the end of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in a side view. In the seventeenth embodiment, the second ball-throwing portion 17942c and the end portions of the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in a side view. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 in the seventeenth embodiment is formed such that the distal end surface 17981b3 of the standing distal end is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the distal end side. . In other words, the front end surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

  On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed such that the leading end surface 17942c3 of the projecting leading end face is inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball feeding portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b in the state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball feeding unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

  Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the game ball passing direction, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the game ball passing direction. Compared to the case of (seventh embodiment), the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be slid along the slope and hardly rebounded. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, for example, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having the recessed portion 16981b2 as in the sixteenth embodiment. The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection mold can be moderated. Improvements can be made.

  Next, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the 18 embodiment is the second It is arranged on the rolling path of a game ball that enters from the winning opening 140. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a), and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 according to the eighteenth embodiment as viewed from the back, and FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 135 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line in FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a).

  135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the opened state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 being forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a), and 137 (a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b), and 137 (b), only the pair of wing members 945, the rear base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. The

  As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 135 (a)) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that is bent substantially L-shaped when viewed from the back, and extends from the non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the gravitational direction, and from the end portion of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 below the gravitational direction. And a transmission portion 18966a7 that is bent and extended toward the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction. Thereby, when a pair of wing member 945 is made into a closed state, it can control that the game ball which passes the 2nd prize opening 140 flows in into penetration hole 981c of ball sending unit 970 from rolling part 943a.

  Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that inclines toward the front side toward the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball feeding portion 942c. That is, in the rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball feeding portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

  Further, the transmission member 18958 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger rotation range on the distal end portion 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension in the gravitational direction on the front end portion 965a side is set to be larger, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension in the gravitational direction of the second winning opening 140.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896g can be disposed above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning is placed inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view. An opening in the mouth 140 can be arranged.

  Further, the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity by the displacement of the transmission member 18958, so that the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. The protrusion 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a first after the protrusion 945b slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmission portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b relative to the back base 942 changes when sliding on the non-transmission portion 18966a6. Without sliding, it slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6. On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is pushed and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7 when sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. Thereby, a pair of wing member 945 is displaced to an open state.

  Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball feeding unit 970 from the rolling portion 943a.

  On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing member 945 is rotated by the projection 945b of the wing member 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966g is disposed below the inner periphery of the second winning opening 140 in the gravitational direction, and the side surface on the front side is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and Since it abuts against the projecting tip of the second ball-throwing portion 942c, a second prize is awarded between the blade portion 18966g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball-throwing portion 942c in accordance with the movement to be displaced downward in the direction of gravity. The biased object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut.

  That is, the displacement member 18966 traverses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning port 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of wing members 945 are closed, Since the blade portion 18966g is rubbed against the edge portion of the passage (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c), it is illegally inserted from the second winning port 140 into the passage of the game ball. The feature can be cut.

  For example, the detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) detects the passage of the game ball by adhering the tip of the thread to the game ball and causing the game ball to enter from the second winning opening 140 and passing through the rolling portion 943a. In the state where the game ball has reached (see), there is an illegal act that the detection device SE4 detects a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread and reciprocating the game ball. According to the eighteenth embodiment, in response to such an illegal act, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. 18966 is slid, and when the blade portion 18966g crosses the path of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the blade portion 18966g to roll. When pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second ball feeding portion 942c, and when 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second ball feeding portion 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, when the projections 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut (folded) by an illegal act of the player, the through-holes of the displacement members 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is disposed on the lower side in the gravity direction. Thereby, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the flow of the game balls entering from the second winning opening 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 18966.

  In this case, the transmission member 18965 is biased by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the tip end portion 18965a is displaced downward in the gravitational direction. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in a direction to close the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 is forcibly opened by the player's fraud, the displacement member 18966 can be prevented from being forcibly opened in the same manner. As a result, the player's cheating can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is not limited, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface has been described. Instead of the LED 651, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be disposed in front of the board member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated in the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed from a light-transmitting material has been described. 630 and groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmissive material and a non-transmissive material.

  For example, the back surface 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a non-permeable material layer, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by the layer of the non-permeable material. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In this case, the layer formed of the non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transmissive material layer. It is preferable to interpose a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material. Thereby, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or design can be clearly revealed.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, a seal of a member (for example, silver foil or aluminum) having a higher reflectivity than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectivity (For example, white) may be printed.

  In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sticking or printing. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by sticking or printing.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sealing or printing. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or design can be clearly revealed.

  In addition, when attaching a seal | sticker, you may attach the seal | sticker in the state protruded from the back part 632 of the gear member 630 and the front part 642 of the groove | channel formation members 640 and 2640 to the outer edge side. In this case, since the light radiated from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light radiated from the LED 651 can be easily condensed on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having higher reflectivity than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be interposed.

  In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it can suppress that the intensity | strength (light quantity) of the light irradiated at irradiation angle (alpha) 3 reduces, the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and inject | emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, Patterns and designs can be clearly revealed.

  Further, the light emitted from another device in the game area can be prevented from entering the projection plate member 3620 by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It can suppress that a pattern and a symbol are displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an elastic body of a rubber-like body, a torsion spring, A leaf spring may be used. The attachment method is exemplified by a state in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and attached, or an aspect in which the protrusion 852 is attached between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved about the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. 850 may be one that slides and displaces a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction is the same as in the first embodiment. Since it can be an orthogonal projection motion of constant-velocity circular motion and a change can be given to the displacement speed, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be disposed at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630 and 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640 and 3640.

  Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate. Patterns and symbols can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). The surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction), and the light emitted from the LED 651 May be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  In this case, the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. A part of the light can be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used for both the light for displaying the pattern and the pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and the light for irradiating other irradiated objects.

  In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are disposed in parallel has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  Specifically, the light irradiating surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the back side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the illuminating surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the position where the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated to the side end faces. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks out from the inner edges of the front bases 612, 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It is good also as a position irradiated to a side end surface.

  Further, the LED 651 is disposed in a state where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the LED 651 is disposed at the position where the LED 651 is disposed. It is good also as a position where the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to this irradiation surface is irradiated to the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In addition, the LED 651 is disposed in a state where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, with the light irradiation surface facing the back side or the front side. It is good also as a position where the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of LED651 is irradiated to the front part 632 of the groove formation members 640, 2640, 3640 or the back part 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is irradiated from the front of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case where the emitted light quantity is increased has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 is changed to the projection plate member. The pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

  That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by providing an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the front part is emitted from the front side by the reflection part 622 of the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection part 622 of the second region and from the right side surface. Incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. As a result, a plurality of patterns and design patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be formed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

  In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, on the top). The arranged light source irradiates the first region with light incident from the upper end, the light source arranged on the left side irradiates the second region by entering from the left end surface, and the light source arranged on the right side is the right end. However, there is a problem in that the product cost increases because it is necessary to provide a plurality of light sources.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, a case where the second or third area is irradiated and a case where the first area is irradiated. Therefore, the number of the LEDs 651 disposed can be reduced correspondingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by being connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor newly disposed.

  In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654, and thus the projection plate member 5620. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front. In other words, the direction of light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the display of patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

  In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and the gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661, between the opposed surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. Although the case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described unit (projection) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in a state where two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

  In this case, by displaying the patterns and symbols on the respective projection plate members 620, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the respective projection plate members 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and symbols, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected on the side surface may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, it is possible to easily collect the light emitted from the LED 651 at the center of the projection plate member 3620.

  In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed. The display may be divided.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 in a state where the light of the LED 651 disposed in the irradiation unit 650 is irradiated, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). .

  In addition, the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape when viewed from the back. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

  That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape when viewed from the rear surface or the sliding groove 966a2 is curved, the protrusion 945b slides along the sliding groove 966a2, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion The gap with 945b changes. Accordingly, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b is increased, the projection 945b is easily moved by the gap, and the wing member 945 is easily rattled.

  On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the back, and the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly on the displacement member 966, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 The gap with the projection 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly along a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extending length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the thickness of the displacement member 966 can be improved by suppressing the amount of lightening due to the recess of the sliding groove 966a2.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the screw that is screwed into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a screw may be used for fastening and fixing the specific prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

  In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is projected from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 is in a closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 may be pulled into the inside of the main body portion.

  In this case, the displacement members 11966 and 12966 are inserted into the rolling passages of the game balls that the rolling portions 943a and the second ball feeding portions 942c roll by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. The unauthorized object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

  In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a. Thus, the case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the annular spring 961c is separated from the main body 961a by disposing a stretched spring between the main body 961a and the annular ring 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying power to the main body 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

  In this case, similarly to the above, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed of two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a larger displacement than the first member 11967. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, the displacement amount of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific prize opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, an annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955 is increased.

  In this case, in order to secure a crossroad from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed by using a tool such as a drill, the traveling direction of the drill is changed to the outer periphery of the annular protrusion 953c. It is possible to easily damage (disconnect) the wiring HS3 by shifting (sliding) in the lateral direction (direction separating from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c radially outward) on the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion).

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized by the player has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not necessarily limited thereto. You may attach the sticker by which the information which consists of a character or a figure is displayed on the side.

  In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front side) side of the pitching path TR0, the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 of the distribution unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning slot unit 930) is displayed. ), The player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 using the display as a mark (reference position) even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized. Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a seal, and printing with ink or two-color formation may be used.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of Invention with Drive Unit 600 as an Example>
A entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening, and opening or closing the entrance opening, and the pair of wing members A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating the driving unit; and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism is a driving force of the driving unit. And a projecting portion projecting from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and a projecting portion thereof. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that a sliding groove through which the installed portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

  Here, a entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and that open or close the entrance opening, and the pair of 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members (for example, JP-A 2010- 234099). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is coupled to a projecting portion that projects from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, a facing portion is formed on one end side of the rotating member so as to be opposed to each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the projecting portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the facing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable because it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion. That is, when the rotating member is rotated for the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the projecting portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is the outer shape (thickness) of the projecting portion. If it is equal to (3), the projecting portion interferes between the opposing portions, and the rotating member cannot be rotated. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing interval between the facing portions so that the projecting portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion increases accordingly. As a result, since the shakiness of the wing member is likely to occur, the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member. Since the projecting portion protrudes from one of the wing members, the sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the slide member is a slide displacement, and the posture of the slide groove is not inclined with respect to the projecting portion, so that it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width can be reduced by setting the groove width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding portion, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding portion can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

  The sliding groove may be a concave groove (dent) or a through groove (opening). In other words, the sliding groove only needs to be formed so that the inserted projecting portion is slidable along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

  In the gaming machine A1, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the slide displacement direction of the slide member is a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is substantially the same as the wing member. They can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and linearly extends in a direction perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member. A gaming machine A3 that is extended in a shape.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion projects from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly, The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protruding portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be a constant size. Therefore, shakiness of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member, the extending length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the slide member by suppressing the amount of lightening due to the recess of the slide groove.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and the sliding member slides upward in the gravitational direction. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the position of the projecting portion when starting the game is set below the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

  Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, since the slide member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, the slide member is slid and displaced upward in the gravitational direction. At the time of the operation, the inertial force is increased by adding the weight of the slide member, and the driving force necessary for the driving means is increased. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member. Since the position of the protruding portion when the member starts sliding displacement upward in the gravity direction is set below the gravity direction of the rotating shaft of the wing member, the protruding configuration pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove As for the displacement component of the part, the horizontal direction component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be decreased (minimized). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting or closing the wing member in a stopped state to start or close it.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the gaming machine A5 is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction. It can be rotated by (self-weight). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started and opened.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation shaft of the wing member and gravity A gaming machine A6, wherein an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the direction is formed.

  According to gaming machine A6, in either gaming machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the gravitational direction has a wing member Since the inclined surface that includes the rotation axis and is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to the gravity direction is formed, even when the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation direction of the rotation axis of the wing member The protruding portion can be guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface, and the slide displacement of the slide member directed upward in the gravitational direction can be started smoothly.

  In addition, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protruding portion be reduced, but also the protrusion can come into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the installation portion in the gravitational direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can also be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the wing member in the opened or closed stop state. That is, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even under the influence of vibration accompanying the flow of the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove is recessed with a receiving portion that receives the protruding portion when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed, The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the projecting portion is received on the inner wall of the sliding groove when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. Since the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  In the gaming machine A7, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion when the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A7, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion. ) Can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and an overhanging portion that protrudes from a tip of the abutting portion, and the slide member is configured to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion that abuts one side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement from the one-side abutted portion. And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the abutting part is brought into contact with the one-side abutted part and the projecting part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other-side abutted part is When the rotating member is rotated to the other side to the position where the other side of the contact part comes into contact, Gaming machine A9, characterized in that the engagement between the slide member is released.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is One side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted portion and the direction of slide displacement Since the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member with a predetermined interval, the other abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts is provided. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contacting portion with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side. When the member is closed, the rotating member is rotated to the other side. Pushed by, that the slide member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, in a state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutting part comes into contact with at least the other side abutted part, the engagement with the slide member of the overhanging part is released. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side to open the wing member.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member. A projecting portion projects from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes an abutting portion and an overhang portion protruding from the tip of the abutting portion, and the slide member is rotated when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. In order to open the wing member which is disposed opposite to the one-side abutted portion with a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement with respect to the one-side abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion is abutted When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted. When the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, and the wing When the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state to the position where the one-side contact portion comes into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. A gaming machine A10, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is One side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted portion and the direction of slide displacement Since the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member with a predetermined interval, the other abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts is provided. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contacting portion with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side. When the member is closed while the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other-side contacted part is Pushed by the side, that the slide member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion comes into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the slide member is slid toward the other side by rotating the rotating member further to the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form in a simple shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, not only the strength decreases, but the engagement may be easily released. On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed as in the present invention, the shape of the projecting portion and the one-side contact portion is rotated by the projecting portion being disengaged from the slide member. There is no need to form the member in an allowable shape for rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that can easily maintain the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be hardly released.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, including a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball that has entered the entrance, and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, A gaming machine A11, wherein a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the gaming machine A11 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage of a gaming ball that has entered the entrance, and the protruding portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. For example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the entry from the entrance is made. The flow of the played game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. A gaming machine A12 comprising a rubbing portion that traverses the passage of the passage member when the member is slid and contacts the edge of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the sliding member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where it is closed, the passage member crosses the passage of the passage member. Since the slide member includes a rubbing portion that is in rubbing contact with the edge portion, an illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance can be cut.

  For example, when the tip of a thread is bonded to a game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance and through the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is an illegal act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (feeding out, pulling) and reciprocating the game ball. In response to such fraud, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is inserted in a state where the wing member is opened, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, When the rubbing part crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member. When being rubbed against the edge, the yarn can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact part of a slide member from a metal material. In this case, the whole slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (sliding contact portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entirety of the passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (a portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed from the metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) with which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. A gaming machine A13 comprising a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub the edges of each other.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the path of the passage member is crossed and the edges of each other are separated. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members to be rubbed, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  For example, when the tip of a thread is bonded to a game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance and through the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is an illegal act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (feeding out, pulling) and reciprocating the game ball. According to the present invention, in response to such a fraud, even if the above-described game ball is inserted with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the opened position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edge part that is rubbed against each other) may be formed from the metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

  In the gaming machine A12 or A13, the drive means is configured such that the drive shaft is displaced in the first direction by electromagnetic force and the drive shaft is displaced in the second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator that is operated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing means, and the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. A gaming machine A14 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A12 or A13, the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the slide member is moved when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. A one-side abutting portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side so as to open the wing member disposed opposite to the one-side abutting portion A game apparatus, comprising: an other-side abutted portion on which the other side of the abutting portion abuts, wherein the one-side abutted portion and the other-side abutted portion are formed at a substantially center in the width direction. Machine A15.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A14, when the rotating member has a contact portion, the sliding member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side so as to be opposed to the one-side abutted portion and open the wing member And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one side abutted portion and the other side abutted portion are formed at the substantially center in the width direction, so that the pair of wing members and the rotation It is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member. Therefore, the sliding member can be smoothly displaced by the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

  That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member and opening or closing the pair of wing members, When the position of the slide member is changed, the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations, and is also connected to the rotating member at two locations. It is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member, and a resistance is generated when the slide member is slid and displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), thereby preventing the opening or closing of the wing member. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and is connected to the rotating member at one location. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily tolerate a change in the attitude of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member.

  Note that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side abutted portion and the other-side abutted portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in a state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And the position on the virtual line along the direction of slide displacement is meant.

  In the gaming machine A15, the width dimension on one side and the other side of the abutting portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum outer dimension of the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the abutting part is set to at least three times or less the maximum outer dimension of the projecting part. The posture change of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member can be easily allowed. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimension of the one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be not more than twice the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion. This is because it is possible to more easily achieve the above-described attitude change tolerance.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 930 as an example>
A first entrance, a first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first entrance, first driving means that drives the first opening / closing member, a second entrance, and a second entrance In a gaming machine comprising: a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth; and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are provided on the second opening / closing member. A gaming machine B1 provided on the back side.

  Here, the first entrance, the first opening / closing member for opening or closing the first entrance, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second entrance, and the first entrance 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a second opening / closing member that opens or closes two entrances and a second driving unit that drives the second opening / closing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the door and it is difficult to effectively use the space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the back side of the first opening / closing member (first entrance) is provided. A space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first driving means and the second driving means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices becomes the first opening / closing member (first insertion member). It can be secured on the back of the ball opening), and the space can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine B1, the front projected area of the second opening / closing member is larger than the front projected area of the first opening / closing member.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a gaming machine B3, wherein a front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than a total front projection area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means And since it is made larger than the total front projection area of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second entrance (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are located on the back side of the second entrance. A gaming machine B4, wherein the gaming machines B4 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the opening and closing member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are the second incoming ball. Since it is provided side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second entrance (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means drive the main body, a driving shaft disposed on one side of the main body, the driving shaft, and the main body. A drive unit that is housed in the unit, and a wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn from the other side of the main body unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit serve as the second drive shaft. A gaming machine B5 that is arranged in a posture toward the opening and closing member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means are a main body, a driving shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and the driving shaft. The first drive means and the second drive means provide the drive shaft to the first drive means and the second drive means. Since the two opening / closing members are arranged in a posture, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily combined.

  In the gaming machine B5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body portion are disposed. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where one outer surface except the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body portion is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where the outer surfaces except the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are disposed are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means. Even if the outputs are different and the sizes of the main body portions are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first drive means and the second drive means from other regions can be simplified.

  That is, when the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are formed in different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body portion and the other main body portion form a step, It is necessary to form a shield plate by bending along the step, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where the outer surfaces of the main body portion are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

  The shield plate divides a region where the first driving unit and the second driving unit are disposed and another region (for example, a region where the detection sensor and the control board are disposed), and the area between the two regions. Is a barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a first passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the first entrance, and a passage for the game ball that has entered the second entrance A second passage member to be formed; and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member, wherein the first opening / closing member rotates to a position sandwiching the entrance. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance are provided, and the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage. A gaming machine B7, comprising: a rotating member disposed between the members; and a sliding member that slides and displaces as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. And a slide member that slides and displaces along with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. Compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Thus, a space can be secured on the back side of the first entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage member. Further, since it is not necessary to bend the first passage member to the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, the first entrance is made closer to the second entrance accordingly. Can do.

  In the gaming machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and the second portion extends from the rotating shaft and is driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine B8, wherein the first portion is formed to be bent in a generally U shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and extends from the rotating shaft and is driven first. A second portion driven by the means, and the first portion is formed to be bent in a generally U shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the sliding amount of the slide member is secured and the first drive means The distance between the slide member can be suppressed.

  That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension of the first portion (the distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) is connected to the slide member from the rotation shaft in the present invention. In the case where the linear distance to the portion is set to be equal, the slide amount of the slide member can be equivalent to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first drive means and the slide member is increased and the whole is increased in size. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion Although the distance between the drive means and the slide member can be equivalent to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed to be bent substantially in the shape of a letter when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion that is opposite to the slide member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. By effectively utilizing the space generated by this, the rotating member can be reduced in size. That is, the rotation member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the game machine includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening and closing member, the first drive unit, A gaming machine B10, which is disposed between the two.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the gaming machine B10 includes a detection sensor that detects a gaming ball that has entered the second entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is in the second open / close state. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, the first sensor part detects the first. Since the driving means can be concealed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform such illegal acts.

  In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, for example, when a drilling process is performed using a tool such as a drill, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection sensor. In the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even if the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and it becomes impossible to visually recognize the place where the fraud has been applied. Therefore, the fraudulent act can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

  The gaming machine B10 includes a case member that houses the detection sensor and a screw member that is fastened to the case member, and a pair of the detection sensors are provided, and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, the first driving means may be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud. In other words, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving unit with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is easily formed between the facing of the pair of detection sensors. By using as the fastening position of the screw member, the unshielded region on the front of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraud.

  The screw member may be a case member made up of two members, for fastening and fixing the two members, or for fastening other members to the case member. good. The screw member is preferably made of metal.

  In the gaming machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the opposing sides of the pair of detection sensors. When fraud is added to the first driving means from the ball opening, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

  That is, the wiring is relatively easily damaged. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first drive means, for example, when a drilling tool is used and drilling is performed, the wiring is damaged due to the fraud. (Disconnection) can be made easy. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraud without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring, and it is possible to easily suppress fraud.

  In the gaming machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. It can be drawn (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

  In the gaming machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat part to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat part is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. A gaming machine B14.

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B12 or B13, the case member has a seat part to which the screw member is fastened, and the diameter of the seat part increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. In order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first drive means, for example, when a drilling tool is used and drilling is performed, the traveling direction of the drill is changed to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (disconnect) the wiring by shifting the position in the lateral direction (side slip) on the outer peripheral surface of the wiring.

  In any one of the gaming machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

  According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of. That is, a wider range in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 as examples>
A game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and A gaming machine comprising: a second member disposed on the back side of the game board; a first engagement portion that engages with the first member; and a second engagement portion that engages with the second member And a third member having the third member.

  Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. A gaming machine that includes a second member that is disposed on the back side of the game board is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage and then flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board, Pass through two passages. Thereby, the passage route of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be provided with interest.

  In this case, if there is a positional shift (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member relative to the first member is ensured. It is requested to do. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member relative to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning those members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed in the process of forming the first member, the gaming board is inverted to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the gaming board. A separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is necessary, which is not practical.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the third member includes the first member engaging with the first member and the second member engaging with the second member. The second member can be positioned with respect to the first member using.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming board includes an opening formed in an opening, and a connection portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in an internal space. A gaming machine C2 in which the third member is disposed in an internal space of the section.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. In other words, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arrangement space for the third member, the machining man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member has the first engagement portion engaged with the first passage of the first member and the second engagement portion engaged with the second passage of the second member. A gaming machine C3, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member has a first engagement portion in the first passage of the first member and a second engagement portion in the second passage of the second member. Since the second member is engaged, the second member can be effectively positioned with respect to the first member. That is, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) in the connection portion between the first passage and the second passage. Since the first member and the second passage can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is more effective than when the other portion is positioned by the third member. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly.

  In the gaming machine C3, a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, so the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage Tolerance or mounting tolerance can be easily tolerated.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member. When each member is attached, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and the third member can be attached at the same time by attaching the first member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engagement portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, there is no need to separately perform an operation of engaging the first engagement portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine C7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the second engagement portion of the third member is the second member from the opposite side to the first member. Since the first member and the third member are attached to the game board at the same time, the second member is attached to the back surface of the game board. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the fixing member includes the third member. A gaming machine C8, wherein the members are fixed or integrally formed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed and a fixing member that is fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed to or formed integrally with the fixing member, the first member can be held (arranged) at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first member rotates to a position where a game ball is formed so as to be able to enter and to communicate with the first passage, and to a position sandwiching the entrance A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a driving force of the driving means for the pair of wing members. A transmission mechanism that transmits to the member, and the transmission mechanism is a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. And the third member is formed such that the third member can guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member and the rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means. And a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, so that the pair of wing members can be opened and closed only by the rotating member, compared with the conventional product that is the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage. Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C9, the pair of wing members includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the slide member includes a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine C10, wherein the third member includes a covering surface portion facing an opening opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C9, the pair of wing members includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the sliding portion that is slidably inserted through the protruding portion. Since the slide member is provided with a moving groove, and the third member is provided with a covering surface portion facing the opening opposite to the blade member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding member slides by the covering surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside, and dust and foreign matter can be prevented from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to stably prevent the pair of wing members from being opened or closed by preventing the sliding of the protruding portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter entering the sliding groove.

<About the concept of the invention taking the specific prize opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball entered in the ball entrance rolls, and its rolling A gaming machine comprising a passage member into which a game ball rolling on the surface flows, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval.

  Here, provided with a ball entrance that is formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entrance A gaming machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-3092). The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that enter the entrance are collected on the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member Into each ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and there is a problem that over winning is likely to occur. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval, even when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game balls to the passage member is increased. Can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened and the flow into the passage member can be made faster. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 includes a detection sensor that detects a gaming ball that has entered the entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes first guide means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entrance is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide means is located at one end in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. And a game machine D3, which is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to contact the gaming ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entrance is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape, the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide is equal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arrange | positioned between a side edge part and a channel | path member, when a game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal direction edge part of a ball entrance, the game ball is made into the 1st inclined surface of a 1st guide means. It can guide to a channel | path member and can be made hard to stay in the longitudinal direction edge part of a rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, another game ball is prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. And over-winning can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and that is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. .

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 includes a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to receive the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, another game ball is prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. And over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D4, the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the length of the rolling surface. The game ball rolling in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be promptly guided (inflowed) to the passage member. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, These game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is opposite to the first region in which the first guide means is disposed with the passage member interposed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine D7, wherein the second area is formed to be inclined downward toward the first area.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. Since the second region on the opposite side across the surface is formed to be inclined downward toward the first region, a game ball that has entered the second region or a game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region Can be quickly rolled toward the passage member using the downward slope of the second region. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D7 is provided with a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D7, the second guiding means is provided so as to protrude from the second area of the rolling surface, so that the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second area. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region by passing the passage member and decelerating before (immediately before) the passage member while increasing the rolling speed to the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D7 or D8, a game that is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface and rolls in the second region of the rolling surface along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine D9 comprising second guide means formed so that a ball can be guided to the entrance side.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the gaming machine D9 is disposed in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. Since the second guiding means formed so as to be able to guide the game ball rolled along the entrance to the entrance is provided, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be decelerated. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region by passing the passage member and decelerating before (immediately before) the passage member while increasing the rolling speed to the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D9, the opening / closing member is disposed at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the opening when the entrance is opened.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D9, when the entrance is opened, the opening / closing member is disposed at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact. The game ball guided to the entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and rebounded toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier. As a result, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the entrance as the side edge portion opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means, The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the side portion opposite to the first guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D9 or D10, the second guiding means is separated from the entrance opening as the side edge opposite to the first guiding means is separated from the first guiding means. In addition to being inclined in the direction, the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly while suppressing jumping out of the entrance. Can be made.

  That is, among the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, a game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed is entered from the entrance. Since the possibility of jumping out to the outside is low, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region by contacting the side edge of the second guide means and guiding to the entrance side. It can suppress and can be made to flow into a passage member early by that much. On the other hand, a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first area (first guide means) by getting over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it can be made to flow into the passage member quickly while suppressing jumping out from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to suppress over winnings by preventing another game ball from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member.

  In the gaming machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge portion facing the first guide means extending in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extending in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the first direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is made larger than the dimension of the side edge part of the 2nd guide means, the game ball which got over the upper surface of the 2nd guide means can be made to contact (collision) with the 1st guide means, and can be decelerated reliably. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

  In the gaming machine D11 or D12, a gaming machine D13 is characterized in that a position separated from the rolling surface by a radius of a gaming ball is included in a side edge portion of the second guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D11 or D12, a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the gaming ball is included in the side edge portion of the second guiding means, so that the upper surface of the second guiding means The game ball that has passed over can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guide means to be surely decelerated, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D8 to D13, the gaming machine D14 is characterized in that the second guiding means is located on an extension of the inclined direction of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D8 to D13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the tilt direction of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means, so the first guiding means Even when the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the second guide means. It can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

  The gaming machine D14 includes a guide groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and that is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the entrance to the passage member, and from the bottom surface of the guide groove, the second guide means A gaming machine D15 characterized in that the height to the top is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D14, the gaming machine D15 includes a guide groove that is formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and that is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Since the height dimension from the first guide means to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When the ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact (collision) with the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can flow into the passage member quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the game machine includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and descends downward from the entrance to the passage member, and the width of the guide groove is A gaming machine D16 that is reduced in size toward the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collises) with the side wall of the guide groove. The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the game ball into the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 as examples>
In a gaming machine comprising a ball entrance unit that is formed so that a game ball can be entered and a ball passage unit that is connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball unit is disposed. The game board has an opening formed in the thickness direction, and the entrance unit has the entrance and a first passage connected to the entrance and is disposed on the front side of the game board. A first unit provided; and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and having a second passage connected to the first passage. A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball unit is disposed A machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting the game board (combined use) by replacing the entering unit with another entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages). it can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the incoming ball unit is disposed on the front surface of the game board, for example, a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages needs to be secured in front of the game board in advance. For this reason, when a ball entering unit with a small number of passages is used, there is a problem in that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the entry unit has an entry port and a first passage connected to the entry port and is disposed on the front side of the game board. 1 unit and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and having a second passage connected to the first passage, so that the front of the game board It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space according to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), the game board can be used when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting the game board. The space in front of can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine E1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the first unit is formed in a front view. A gaming machine E2 that is disposed in an overlapping position.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. Since it is disposed at a position overlapping with one unit, the player can visually recognize the second unit through the first unit, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Also, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board may be formed from a plywood board or a sticker may be attached to the game board. Since it is also possible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of design freedom can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E2, at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, at least the front side of the second path of the second unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the second unit flows down the second path through the first unit. The player can visually recognize the game ball to be played, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The first unit may be entirely made of a light transmissive material. In addition, when only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmissive material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit overlapping the second passage in the front view is formed of the light transmissive material. This is because it is possible to visually recognize the flow of the game ball and enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E3, the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material. When making the player visually recognize the second unit, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down by changing the position in the front-rear direction, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of the display mode include printing with ink, sticking a seal, and two-color molding.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage, and a plurality of second branch passages branched into a plurality from the second upstream passage. And a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit being disposed on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. And a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit that is disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine E6, wherein a plurality of second branch passages are provided with detection sensors for detecting the passage of game balls.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. A second upstream unit, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and having a plurality of second connection passages, and detecting the passage of the game ball in the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensor is arranged, for example, when the gaming machine having a different specification is manufactured by changing the second upstream unit to another unit having a small number of the second branch passages, the number of the detection sensors is set. It can suppress that a worker makes a mistake.

  That is, in the structure in which the detection sensor is provided in the second connection passage, the detection sensor can be provided by the number of the second connection passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed, When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connection passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to provide one detection sensor, but only the number of the second connection passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor is disposed. On the other hand, in the structure in which the detection sensor is arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangements.

  In the gaming machine E6, the first unit includes a second entrance in which a game ball can be entered, and a third path through which the game ball entered in the second entrance is passed, A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A gaming machine E7 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E6, the first unit has a second entrance where a game ball can be entered, and the second unit has entered the second entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensor to detect is arrange | positioned, the detection sensor arrange | positioned in a 2nd unit can be disperse | distributed, and the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of a channel | path can be raised by that much.

  In the gaming machine E7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the second unit is positioned relative to the first unit.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passage is connected is the same. Or by positioning the third passages directly or indirectly, positioning can be performed with respect to the first unit even in a separate unit.

  In addition, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is intended to suppress the occurrence of displacement (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the position shift ( The occurrence of a step can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game balls can flow smoothly.

  In any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit and is protruded A gaming machine E9, wherein a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage projects toward the second downstream unit. In addition, since a receiving portion that receives a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit are positioned by the engagement between the detection sensor and the receiving portion. While being possible, it is possible to suppress the part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the entire second unit.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first unit includes a second entrance where a game ball can be entered, and a third path through which the game ball entered into the second entrance passes. In the second unit, the gaming machine E10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E9, the third path through which the game ball entered into the second entrance is passed is at least between the second branch paths in the second unit. Therefore, the second unit can be downsized.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the inner surface of the outer wall of the bent portion is bent. The game machine E11 is characterized in that a standing part is erected from the side, and the wall part on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the direction of flow of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit. Since the standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the outer wall portion of the bent portion, and the outer wall portion of the bent portion is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the direction of the flow of the game ball, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, the standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the outer wall portion of the bent portion, thereby improving the rigidity of the passage and improving the durability, and playing the game ball along the standing tip of the standing portion. While the guide can be guided to smoothly flow down the bent part, the standing part is located in front of the game ball in front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing part and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is tilted so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flow direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball while standing. Since the thickness of the installation part in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize opening unit 930 and the pitching unit 970 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising: a first passage member through which a game ball passes; and a second passage member through which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that at least a bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and a side surface upstream end on the side surface side among the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

  Here, a game provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through an upstream end connected to the downstream end of the first passage member. A machine is known (for example, JP 2012-5883 A). However, in the structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected in this way, a positional shift between the two is unavoidable, so the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem in that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side of the upstream end of the second passage member and the side surface upstream end on the side surface are formed in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side (bottom surface upstream end) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface (side upstream end) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  In the gaming machine F1, a gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the side surface upstream end includes a position separated from the bottom surface upstream end by a radius of a gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, a position separated from the bottom surface upstream end by the radius of the gaming ball is included in the side surface upstream end, so that the gaming ball is transferred from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed in the side surface upstream end. That is, the position of the step on the bottom side where the game ball is affected and the position of the step on the side can be reliably made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from being affected by the steps on the bottom side and the side steps at the same time, and to easily disperse those effects. ).

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side of the downstream end of the first passage member and the side surface downstream end on the side surface are formed with different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, The passage member includes a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member and has a protruding tip as the side surface downstream end, and the second passage member includes the upstream end. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the gaming machine F3 is provided with a recess that is recessed to receive the protruding piece and that faces the protruding tip of the protruding piece as an upstream end of the side wall.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first passage member protrudes from the downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip thereof is a side downstream end. And the second passage member includes a recess that is recessed at the upstream end of the second passage member to receive the protrusion piece and that faces the protruding tip of the protrusion piece as an upstream end of the side wall. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a position different from the bottom surface upstream end in the game ball passage direction downstream side, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

  On the other hand, the protruding piece is relatively weak in rigidity and may be broken. According to the gaming machine F3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball). Even when the projecting piece is broken, the bottom surface upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (side upstream end) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the influence of the game balls from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influences thereof, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine protruding piece is formed on the first passage member and the concave portion is formed on the second passage member, respectively. The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be restricted. That is, at the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to jump up when riding up, so the reverse step (from the downstream end of the first passage member) However, compared with a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position, it is easy to inhibit smooth flow (passing) of the game ball. Therefore, like the gaming machine F <b> 3, it is possible to restrict the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member because the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for smooth flow of game balls.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that a side surface upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to a passing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F3, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Compared to a case where the game ball is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the slope and hardly rebounded. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F5 is characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The side surface upstream end of the upstream ends can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared with the case where the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the game ball colliding with the side surface upper end surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. Let it be hard to be bounced back. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, for example, as compared with the case where it is formed in a shape (stepped shape) having a protruding piece or a recess. The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection mold can be moderated, so that it is possible to suppress the bubble accumulation (air biting) and filling failure, and to mold It is possible to improve the performance.

  In the gaming machines F4 and F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine. The game ball that has collided with the upstream end can be pressed to the bottom surface side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being bounced up and bounced at the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. As a result, the game ball can be easily passed (flowed down) smoothly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the specific prize opening unit 550 as an example>
A entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening, and opening or closing the entrance opening, and the pair of wing members In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are open from the outside to the opening direction. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that, when displaced, the transmission mechanism is capable of restricting the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

  Here, a ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, a pair of wing members that are disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close And a pair of wings by the driving force of the driving means, and when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the gaming means is allowed to enter the game ball. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting unit that is disposed at a restricting position that restricts the entry of a game ball into the entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

  According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the permissible position, so that the game balls that have passed between the pair of wing members are inserted into the entrance port. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the restricting position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball is moved to the entrance. It is possible to regulate entering the ball.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowed position after the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside. Therefore, there has been a problem that the effect of restricting the illegal entry of game balls into the entrance is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened. Accordingly, it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally entered into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings A projecting portion projects from one of the members, and a slide groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the slide groove In the inner wall, a receiving portion for receiving the protruding portion when the slide member is slid to the position for closing the wing member is recessed, and in the state where the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the projecting portion is received on the inner wall of the sliding groove when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. Since the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  In the gaming machine G2, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member is a direction substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion when the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion. By utilizing (self-weight), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a slide groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is An abutment portion and an overhang portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is moved when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and the one-side abutted portion opposed to the one-side abutted portion with a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation to release the wing member When the member is rotated toward the other side, In the state where the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the one side abutted portion and the tension is applied. When the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member, and the rotating member is rotated to the other side to at least a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts on the other side abutted portion, the projecting portion The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the engagement of the portion with the slide member is released.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, a one-side abutted part that abuts one side of the abutting part, and the one-side abutted part at a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. With the rotation, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, with the rotation, the other-side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contacting portion, By ride member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, in a state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutting part comes into contact with at least the other side abutted part, the engagement with the slide member of the overhanging part is released. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side to open the wing member.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit and a sliding member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a slide groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is An abutment portion and an overhang portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is moved when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts, and the one-side abutted portion opposed to the one-side abutted portion with a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation to release the wing member When the member is rotated toward the other side, And the other side abutted part with which the other side of the part abuts. When the wing member is closed, the overhanging part is disengaged from the slide member and the wing member is closed. When the slide member is slid to a position at which the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. A gaming machine G6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, a one-side abutted part that abuts one side of the abutting part, and the one-side abutted part at a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement And the other side abutted portion with which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. With the rotation, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, with the rotation, the other-side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contacting portion, By ride member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion comes into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that a wing member is forced open | released from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the slide member is slid toward the other side by rotating the rotating member further to the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form in a simple shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, not only the strength decreases, but the engagement may be easily released. On the other hand, in the state where the wing member is closed as in the present invention, the shape of the projecting portion and the one-side contact portion is rotated by the projecting portion being disengaged from the slide member. There is no need to form the member in an allowable shape for rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that can easily maintain the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be hardly released.

  In any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball that has entered the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove. A gaming machine G7, wherein a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the gaming machine G7 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the gaming ball entered into the entrance, and the protruding portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. For example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the entry from the entrance is made. The flow of the played game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 930 as an example>
A entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening, and opening or closing the entrance opening, and the pair of wing members In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the driving means, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball that has entered the entrance A gaming machine H1 characterized in that a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position.

  Here, a entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are pivotally supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and that open or close the entrance opening, and the pair of 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members (for example, JP-A 2010- 234099). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member rotates toward one side or the other side.

  In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is bonded to the game ball, the game ball is inserted from the entrance and the path of the passage member is passed, and the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, There is an illegal act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (drawing and pulling) the other end of the ball and reciprocating the game ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress an illegal act in which the tip of a thread is bonded to a game ball and the detection sensor detects the act multiple times.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, so the middle of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that the detection sensor detects a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine H1, the transmission mechanism moves the slide member across the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member rubs against the edge of the passage member. A gaming machine H2 comprising a rubbing portion.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the transmission mechanism is configured such that when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member Since the rubbing portion that comes into rubbing contact with the edge portion is provided, it is possible to cut an illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  That is, even when the above-described game ball is inserted with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the frictional portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion And the edge of the channel member can be cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact part of a slide member from a metal material. In this case, the whole slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (sliding contact portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entirety of the passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (a portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed from the metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) with which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

  In the gaming machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine H3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pair of paths crossing the passage of the passage member and rubbing the edges of each other Since the transmission member is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  That is, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-described fraud can be suppressed.

  The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edge part that is rubbed against each other) may be formed from the metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the drive means is configured such that the drive shaft is displaced in the first direction by electromagnetic force and the drive shaft is displaced in the second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator that is operated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing means, and the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. A gaming machine H4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, the displacement from the opening position of the wing member to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion; and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. In the gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member out of the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. The gaming machine I1 is provided with an emission increasing means that is arranged outside the display area.

  Here, a light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member, from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. A gaming machine in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by arranging the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device through the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection portion. Then, the light is transmitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion includes a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group has a pattern or a pattern shape. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. For this reason, it becomes difficult to clearly display (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiating means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption increase, but also the amount of heat generated increases, which causes a problem that heat is exerted on other members and devices.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the game machine I1 includes the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiating means. The light emitted from the front surface of the transmissive member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to clearly display (display) a pattern or a pattern. In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be prevented from deteriorating accordingly.

  In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of the light transmissive member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmissive member, or may be inside the light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine I1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I2, since the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, the light increasing means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Condensation efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflection part of the light transmission member among the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected from the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member is strengthened. , Patterns and designs can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

  Further, in this way, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, when other devices in the game area emit light. Can prevent the light from the other device from being blocked by the outer edge member and entering from the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. It can suppress that a pattern and a pattern are displayed on the front of a light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine I2, the outer edge member is disposed on each of a front surface and a back surface of the light transmitting member, and the gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, respectively, so that of the light irradiated from the light irradiating means, Light that is not directly incident on the side end face but is off the front side of the light transmitting member and light that is off the back side is reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

  Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted from other devices in the game area arrives from either the front or back side of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, it can be prevented from entering from the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. Thus, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is arranged to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is disposed so as to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, it is possible to easily reflect the reflected light at the projecting portion of the outer edge member (surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) and to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the outer edge member is formed from a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member in the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, and thus is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of the same refractive index material, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easy to be transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) at the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine I4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be converted into the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected), and thus light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  The gaming machine I6 according to any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between a front surface and a back surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end face of the light transmissive member can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmissive member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) at the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine I5, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the light transmission member is rotatably supported and includes a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism rotates and drives the pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member. A gaming machine I7 comprising drive means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface. The curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a driving means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved along with the simplification of the structure.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I7, the light transmission member is rotatably supported and includes a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface of the annular shape. Since the concave rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide grooves, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are exposed by the action of the guide grooves and the support rings, that is, the light The light transmissive member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end face of the transmissive member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmissive member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or symbol displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmissive member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, since the light irradiated from the light irradiating means can be concentrated on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support wheel can be used as the outer edge member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

  The support wheel may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed so as not to rotate. In this case, as a form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a form in which the support wheel rotatably supported rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or cannot rotate. A configuration in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove is exemplified.

  Further, in the gaming machine I8 that is subordinate to the gaming machine I7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is provided on one of the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is provided is provided on the light transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange each on the other of the front or the back. That is, by arranging the outer edge members on the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because each of the light deviating to the side and the light deviating to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In addition, as described above, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, so that light emitted from other devices in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member. Even in this case, the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the rear surface can block each other, and the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which an outer peripheral side thereof faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine I9 characterized by being a groove.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmission member with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the outer edge member and the light transmission member Since the space between the two is a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section by bearing one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the structure described above can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Or it can be easily reflected on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has an irradiation direction of light from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine I10, wherein the irradiation surface is disposed so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmission member and facing the side end surface of the light transmission member, the side end surface of the light transmission member irradiated from the light irradiation means Can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention taking the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which each irradiation surface faces the target member. And at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and one or a plurality of substrate members formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. A featured gaming machine J1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting units each arranged in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target member (for example, JP-A-2015 2015). -29735). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting portion. The light can be emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present invention forms the target member in a disk shape from the light-transmitting material and forms the reflection portion, while the plurality of light emitting means are irradiated on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). The structure which arrange | positions so that the circumference | surroundings of a target member may be surrounded in the attitude | position which faced, and inject | emitted the light irradiated from each light emission means from the outer peripheral surface of a target member was devised (it is unknown at the time of this-application application).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it has been newly found that there is a problem in that it takes a lot of time and labor to arrange a plurality of light emitting means around the target member. In particular, since the plurality of light emitting means need to be arranged in a posture in which each irradiation surface faces the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different orientation), the labor of the arrangement work also increases from this point. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of board members formed to be elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. Therefore, by disposing one substrate member on the base member, the disposition work of at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the labor for arranging the light emitting means.

  Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, it is possible to suppress the labor of disposing the light emitting means from this point.

  In the gaming machine J1, a gaming machine J2 including a block body that is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the block body is formed with higher rigidity than the board member and disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Further, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member by suppressing the warpage and the bending of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine J2, the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the board member where the block body is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the light emitting means is disposed in the region of the board member where the block body is disposed. And the influence of bending can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the block bodies are disposed on the board member at a predetermined interval, and the base member is positioned in a posture in which the board members positioned between the block bodies are elastically deformed. A gaming machine J4 that is held by the body.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the board members positioned between the block bodies are elastic. Since the base body is held in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the opposite side of the target member. A gaming machine J5, which is arranged on the back.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the board member facing the target member, and the block body is on the opposite side of the target member. Therefore, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

  In the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the head of the screws protrudes from the front of the board member.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the head of the screws protrudes from the front of the board member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, it is possible to prevent the screw head from coming into contact with the member and the light emitting means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine J6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

  The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by arranging the light emitting means between the screw heads arranged in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the screw head, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving the protrusion is fitted into the other of the base body or the block body. The gaming machine J8 is characterized by being recessed.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J2 to J7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and the fitting is received and fitted into the protrusion. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, the block body can be disposed on the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the disposing operation can be suppressed. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in a posture in which the block bodies are elastically deformed (bent), one block body is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent), and the work can be performed in such a manner that the other block body is fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body includes a recess on a surface disposed on the substrate member, and an electronic component disposed on the substrate member is accommodated in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine J9 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in any of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body is provided with a concave portion on the surface disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the concave portion of the block body. Since the electronic component is accommodated, the electronic component can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of Invention Taking Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. The apparatus includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state where it is disposed on the base member in a form displaced in the direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine K1 in which gravity acting on the displacement member balances with an elastic recovery force of the elastic member.

  Here, a base member, a displacement member that is disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that provides an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, JP 2011-239870 A). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is disposed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position and the second position) that is not visible to the player or is located on the outer edge side of the game area, while the predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhang position (the other of the first position and the second position) projecting into the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhang position is played. An effect to make the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

  In contrast, the gaming machine K1 includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position by the action of gravity. In a state where it is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member balances with the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this balance position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be an orthogonal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be subjected to an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). The variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement only by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, and it is not necessary to complicate the structure and control. Improvement.

  In the gaming machine K1, one end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine K2.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. This is necessary when releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member and causing the displacement member to perform reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

  The gaming machine K2 includes a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving unit. And a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the transmission means is arranged to be rotatable on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. And a connecting member whose one end is connected to the displaced member and the other end is connected to the displacing member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacing member is released, the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member When reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the attitude of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the rotating member is rotated out of the force in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocation displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can have an interesting displacement.

  In the gaming machine K3, in the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that a direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member The direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the connecting member and the connecting member and the displacement member. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced when going from the balance position in either direction of push-pull. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balance position, so that the reciprocation of the displacement member can be easily continued.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the protruding portion, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is more than the central range. When the displacement member is displaced within an outer range close to the gaming machine K5, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be in contact therewith.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion that projects toward the other, and is between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced within the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the coupling member, and the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. While the driving force of the driving means can be When displacing the displacement member more, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member can be suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine K5, the outside range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine K6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Therefore, in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member using the protruding portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, so that it acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while using gravity.

  For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area. In the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member to improve the appearance and durability, and to inhibit the effects of other members from being disturbed. Can be quickly projected (displaced) to the second position when the first position is displaced from the first position to the second position (projected position), and the effect of the projecting operation can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotation member, the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. A gaming machine K7.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction becomes the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is A state that does not occur (ie, dead center) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to smoothly (rapidly) displace the displacement member, while the second After being arranged at the position, the above-described dead point can suppress the rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

  In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes an abutting portion formed so as to be able to abut on the base member, and the abutting portion is connected to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine K8.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base. It is on a substantially straight line connecting the connection position of the member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connection position of the displacement member and the base member across the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member. When the displacement member shakes against the base member, the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate by the contact portion of the connecting member coming into contact with the base member. It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation axis with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the shaft. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of Invention with Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the displacement member, the drive unit includes a first drive unit, a first drive unit, And a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the first driving unit, and a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the second driving unit. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, JP 2011-239870 A). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is disposed at a retracted position that is not visible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, and when a predetermined game state is formed, the tension member that protrudes to the game area is formed. An effect is produced in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position and the player visually recognizes the movement of the displaced member that is displaced toward the extended position.

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to a single pattern, so that the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern As a result, it was difficult to produce a player's intention. Even if the driving force of the driving means is varied to provide a change, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant, so that the player's intention can be expressed. It was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the two drive means, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the production is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since it can be displaced in the same manner of displacement, it is possible to produce an effect that makes a player's intention by switching the displacement manner.

  In the gaming machine L1, the first member is slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first driving means, and the second driving means is slidably disposed on the base member. And a second member driven by the first member and the second member, wherein the first member and the second member are at least rotatably coupled to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the base member is slidably disposed and the first member is driven by the first driving means, and the base member is slidably disposed. And a second member driven by the second driving means, and the first part and the second part of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member, respectively, at least rotatably. When the first member is slid and displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to rotate. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side can be formed. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, it is possible to produce an effect that gives a player's intention by switching the displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine L2, the two types of displacement are not formed by making the rotation center the same and making the rotation direction different, but forming the rotation directions different and the rotation centers different. Therefore, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform an effect that makes the player's intention.

  In the gaming machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connection pin protruding from one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine L3 that is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member. Since the connecting pin protruding from the second guide member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving unit or the driving force of the second driving unit Depending on whether or not the second member is displaced linearly, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side are formed. it can. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, it is possible to produce an effect that gives a player's intention by switching the displacement modes.

  In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). In that case, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used, and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve durability and operation reliability.

  In the gaming machine L3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so the first driving means or the second In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the drive means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first drive means and the second drive means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to make it easy to produce a player's intention by switching such displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine L4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but in addition to changing the rotation direction and the position of the rotation center, the type of displacement itself can be different. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and the effect of giving the player's intention can be further facilitated.

  In the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being speeded.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed is different from the displacement speed of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the linear displacement direction of the first member and the second member while maintaining the posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating the posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to produce a player's intention.

  It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement manner combining such rotational motion and linear motion in the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. As in the present invention, it is possible to use two driving means for the first time.

  Any of the gaming machines L1 to L5 includes a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine L6.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming machine L6 includes the second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second drive means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. The apparatus (change) of the displacement mode by the first drive unit and the displacement mode by the second drive unit can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to make it easier to produce a player's intention.

<Concept of Invention with Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that an irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the one or both displacements.

  Here, a game that includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace it, and performs an effect by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, JP, 2011-239870, A). In this gaming machine, light irradiating means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (player side surface) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light part from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (the light transmitting part) emits light. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that the mode of visual recognition by the player is scarce and it is difficult to have interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both, The aspect visually recognized by the player can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player interest.

  In addition, as the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation unit is changed, or the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation unit to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. And the combination of these are exemplified.

  The gaming machine M1, comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed displaceably on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

  The gaming machine M2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member. The gaming machine M2 allows a player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. Formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and provided with a reflection portion, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflection portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A gaming machine M3 characterized by this.

  Here, the reflecting portion includes a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, the gaming machine M3 includes a shielding member that has an opening and is disposed on the base member, and allows the player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, the player can visually recognize different portions of the target member from the opening of the shielding member.

  For example, a first position in which a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflecting portion is visible through the opening, and a second group that is a group different from the first group is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position that can be visually recognized via the first member, the first member can be disposed through the opening of the shielding member by arranging the target member at the first position. While allowing the player to visually recognize the first pattern or design to be formed, the pattern or design to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position. The second pattern or the pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

  In this case, since the target member is formed of a light transmissive material, when the target member is displaced in order to change a pattern or a pattern visually recognized by the player, light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. A gaming machine M4.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and can be rotated to the base member around the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Therefore, as compared with the case where the target member is slidable, the target member is disposed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. The space required for this can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M2, the target member is formed from a light transmissive material in a plate shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with a reflection portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface is received. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiating means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the circular center as a rotation center.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the target member is formed in a circular plate shape from a light-transmitting material and is provided with a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. it can.

  In the gaming machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions that are equidistant from the rotation center of the target member. Regardless of the phase, the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

  The gaming machine M7 includes a base member, and the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member. Variations in changes in the irradiation mode can be increased. Therefore, the aspect visually recognized by the player can be changed, and the player can be easily provided with interest.

  The gaming machine M7 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit comes into contact with the target member that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. The gaming machine M8 is displaced together with the target member.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M7, the gaming machine M8 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit is a target that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Since the member is abutted and displaced together with the target member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. it can.

  Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A gaming machine K1 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A gaming machine K2 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A gaming machine K3 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 60 base board (game board)
60a Through hole (opening)
64 First prize opening (first passage)
140 Second winning entrance (entrance entrance, first entrance entrance)
65a Special winning entrance (second entrance)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 Cart member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 Projection member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L Lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R Lower right rack (first member or second member)
488b Drive pin (connecting pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base member 611, 5611, 6612 Rear base (base member)
612, 5612 Front base (base member)
612g Holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 Reflector 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Substrate member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Projecting portion 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (drive means)
940 Front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second pitching part (a part of the first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 Wing member (first opening and closing member)
945b Protrusion (projecting part)
951 Plate member (second opening and closing member, opening and closing member)
953a1 opening (entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Torus (seat)
954b Concave part (guide groove)
954c Projecting part (second guide means)
954c2 Side edge portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Concave portion (passage member)
957a1 body 957a2 shaft (drive shaft)
960 Drive unit (third member)
961a Body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f Wall (covered surface)
962g Projecting part (first engaging part)
140 Second winning entrance (entrance entrance, second entrance entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of the first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Protruding part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recessed portion (receiving portion)
966b2 One-side contacted part 966b3 Other-side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 2nd blade part (part of cutting member)
6683 blade (part of cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bent part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (standing part)
985e1, 985f1 inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 pitching passage (part of second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 first passage (part of second passage, second branch passage)
TR2 second passage (part of second passage, second branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Color (support ring)
θ1 First drive range (outer range)
θ2 Second drive range (center range)

Claims (3)

A ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball entered in the ball entrance rolls, and its rolling In a gaming machine comprising a passage member into which a game ball rolling on the surface flows,
A gaming machine, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval.   2. The game according to claim 1, further comprising a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the entrance, wherein the detection sensor is disposed at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine.   First guide means having a first inclined surface that is formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface, wherein the entrance is horizontally long The rolling surface is formed in a rectangular shape and extends along the longitudinal direction of the entrance, and the first guide means is disposed between one end portion in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and the passage member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is arranged in a row.

Images